JP2019024960A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine enabling a music selection more matching to a player's liking and situation, and thereby capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: Music to be outputted during a special game state is configured to be selectable by a player. Also, an output content of the selected music is configured to be changeable by the player. In the special game state, a first portion and a second portion next to that in the selected specific music can be outputted. The output content is changeable so that an output is to be started from the second portion in the selected specific music. The first portion in the specific music is set to have a longer time than a value obtained by multiplying a minimum time required for playing a game one time by the number of times of games that can be continued in the special game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 154

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachislot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege granted to a player, a replay (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming the game media. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  In a conventional gaming machine, according to the number of games between advantageous game states advantageous to the player, a music piece that can be selected from a plurality of music pieces that are played during the advantageous game state is determined. There is known one that allows a player to select a song within a range (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-423 A

  However, for example, the interest in selecting music and the speed at which the game progresses vary from player to player or depending on the time of the game. A gaming machine capable of making a selection has been desired.

  The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enables music selection that matches a player's preference and situation and can improve the interest of the game. And

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following first configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot 1) that can be controlled in a special gaming state (e.g., BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player by performing a game by variably displaying multiple symbols in multiple columns,
Music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music;
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music;
Output content change means (for example, touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected by the music selection means,
The plurality of songs include specific songs,
The music output means, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first of the music) and the second part following the first part (For example, music number 2) can be output,
The output content changing means outputs so that, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means starts output from the second portion of the specific music in the special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the contents can be changed.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following second configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot 1) that can be controlled in a special gaming state (e.g., BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player by performing a game by variably displaying multiple symbols in multiple columns,
Music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music;
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music;
Output content change means (for example, touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected by the music selection means,
The plurality of songs include specific songs,
The music output means, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means,
When the special condition is satisfied, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first part of the music) and the second part (for example, the second part of the music) following the specific music Output,
If the special condition is not satisfied, only the first part of the specific music is output in the special game state,
The output content changing means is the case where the specific music is selected by the music selection means, and the specific music is in the special game state when the special condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine is characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to output only the second part.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following third configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot 1) that can be controlled in a special gaming state (e.g., BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player by performing a game by variably displaying multiple symbols in multiple columns,
Music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music;
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music;
Output content change means (for example, touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected by the music selection means,
The special gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued over a predetermined number of games (for example, 24 times),
The plurality of songs include specific songs,
The music output means, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first of the music) and the second part following the first part (For example, music number 2) can be output,
The first portion of the specific musical piece has a time (for example, 150 seconds) longer than a value obtained by multiplying the minimum number of times (for example, 4.1 seconds) required for one game by the predetermined number of times. Is set to
The output content changing means outputs so that, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means starts output from the second portion of the specific music in the special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the contents can be changed.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

In a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot 1) that can be controlled in a special gaming state (e.g., BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player by performing a game by variably displaying multiple symbols in multiple columns,
Music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music;
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music;
Output content change means (for example, touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected by the music selection means,
The special gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued over a predetermined number of games (for example, 24 times),
The music selection means can select a music when the special gaming state is started,
The plurality of songs include specific songs,
The music output means, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first of the music) and the second part following the first part (For example, music number 2) can be output,
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, and when a special condition is satisfied during the special game state, the output content changing means is configured so that the music output means is the second music in the specific music. A game machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to output a portion.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the fourth configuration, when the specific music is selected by the music selection unit, the output content changing unit is configured such that when the special game state is started, the music output unit is A game machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to start output from the second portion of a specific musical piece.

  According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to select a music that matches the preference and situation of the player and to improve the interest of the game.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the example of an external appearance structure in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 shows an internal structure of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a perspective view in a state where a front door is opened. It is a top view which shows the display apparatus in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the touch sensor module attached to the display apparatus in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the front door in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the sub control circuit in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the touch sensor relay circuit in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of the bonus action | operation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for general game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for bonuses in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for a small combination and replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for spinning cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward press in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table at the time of an irregular pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is the transition flow figure of RT state of the gaming machine in one execution form of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, stop order, and RT transfer in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ (chance zone) lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in addition lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in occurrence lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table which adds G number in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BB ART lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BR BR lottery table in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BR1 continuous lottery table of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BR2 continuous lottery table of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the extra addition lottery table during BR of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of additional addition during BR and promotion lottery table of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the extra game number lottery table for additional addition A of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition B of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the extra game number lottery table for additional addition C of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 1) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 2) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 3) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 4) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 5) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 6) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 7) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 8) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 9) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary causal value lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal point lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value stock lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operating condition table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub storage area | region of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock process at the time of the game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction | saving priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority drawing-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus completion | finish check process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation | movement check process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process by control of the main CPU in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production registration task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process during pseudo | simulation bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ART pull-back process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BR continuation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BR continuation determination time process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process during normal in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the causal value related process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the reel stop command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the display command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the penalty determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of no operation command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock production control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the accessory control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lamp | ramp control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sound control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the animation control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the touchscreen control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the touchscreen input edit process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the warning screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the hall menu task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the hall menu screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the hall menu process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the error information log | history screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the maintenance process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the maintenance screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and a touchscreen maintenance screen. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation state display table in the maintenance screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the touchscreen maintenance screen in which the display position of the grid line in one Embodiment of this invention was changed. It is a figure which shows the example of the guide menu screen displayed on the guide initial image displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and a sub screen. It is a figure which shows the state which the finger | toe touches the guide menu "arrangement | payout" of the guide menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state which the finger | toe touches the guide menu "start a memo" of the guide menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the unimemo initial image displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and the unimemo menu screen displayed on a subscreen. It is a figure which shows the example of the password display image displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and the password input menu screen displayed on a subscreen, and shows the state which the finger | toe touches password input menu "E" FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the password display image displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and the password input menu screen displayed on a subscreen, and shows the state which the finger | toe touches password input menu "F" FIG. It is a figure showing the state where "F" concerning detection of selection was displayed on the password display picture displayed on the main screen in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the other example of the password display image (password input area) displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and a password input menu screen (keyboard display area), The state in which all the passwords are input FIG. It is a figure which shows the other example of the password display image (password input area) and password input menu screen (keyboard display area) which are displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and a part of password is not input It is a figure which shows a state. It is an enlarged view of the password display image (password input area) displayed on the main screen in one embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram for explaining the transition of the display mode. It is an enlarged view of the password display image (password input area) displayed on the main screen in one embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram for explaining the transition of the display mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in the other specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in the other specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of the bonus action | operation in the example of another specification of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of RT transition table in the other specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in the other specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for bonuses in the other specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for a small combination and replay in the example of another specification of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the music selection screen at the time of the bonus action | operation in the other specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the change of the output content of the music in the other specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the special state control process in the other specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the customization screen of the character in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the various data regarding customization of the character in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the delivery of the data of the game machine and server in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine (pachinko) in a modification. It is an external appearance front view of the game machine in a modification. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game machine in a modification. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the game machine in a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit with which the game machine in a modification is provided.

Hereinafter, a pachislot machine that is a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
In this embodiment, first, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function for navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and a specific symbol combination are displayed. A pachislot having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which a replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”), which is a gaming state in which the probability is higher than the normal time, is activated will be described. .

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG.
In the pachislot of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to the medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as paying out medals, re-games, bonuses, etc. are given to players, and other so-called “loses”. Is provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is responsible for a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 1 symbol.

  When the internal winning combination allowing the symbol combination display related to winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually displays the symbol combination within the specified time of 190 msec (four symbols) for the winning determination line. The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means is defined for one or more reels when, for example, a challenge bonus (CB), which is a second-type special accessory, and a middle bonus (MB) for continuously operating the CB are operated. The reel rotation is stopped so that the combination of symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. This winning determination means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that it is related to winning, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game.

  Further, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of flows, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is carried out by a sub-control circuit described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity, such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when determining whether there is a winning. In this way, in the pachislot machine, the player has the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is possible to improve the player's interest.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable.
Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that is put on when carrying the pachi-slot 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot 1.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and executes an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including a display window 4 for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. In the present embodiment, the entire display unit 11a including the display window 4 is used to display an image and execute an effect.

Hereinafter, the display windows 4 are referred to as a left display window 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R, respectively.
The display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. These display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and in front of the three reels (player side) ). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are arranged in succession among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R is stopped. It is set to a size that can display two symbols. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, the upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. In the present embodiment, a line connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning determination line for determining whether or not a prize is won.

  The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is disposed so as to overlap the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and includes a decorative frame 100 having two panel openings 100a and 100b exposing the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a decorative frame 100. A transparent protective cover (not shown) for closing the panel openings 100a and 100b.

  The decorative frame 100 includes a partition piece 112 that partitions the panel opening 100a and the panel opening 100b. The two panel openings 100a and 100b are partitioned by the partition piece 112 so as to be aligned in the vertical direction. The panel opening 100 a of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11. The panel opening 100b of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display unit 11a and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The decorative frame 100 is provided with a headlamp 21, a reel lamp 22, a decorative unit 121, and a rotating accessory unit 122. The headlamp 21 has a group of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and is disposed on the top of the decorative frame 100. The reel lamp 22 has a group of LEDs, and is disposed at both ends in the left-right direction of the decorative frame 100 and in the vicinity of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The head lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 turn on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect. The decoration unit 121 is disposed on the right side of the panel opening 100a in the decoration frame 100, and includes an LED (Light Emitting Diode) (not shown). The decoration unit 121 lights up with a color and a lighting pattern corresponding to the content of the effect when a special effect and a predetermined effect are performed. The rotating accessory unit 122 is disposed on the left side of the panel opening 100 a in the decorative frame 100. The rotating accessory unit 122 includes a rotating accessory (gear accessory) 123 (see FIG. 6), an accessory driving unit 124 (see FIG. 7) including a stepping motor that rotates the rotating accessory 123, and light transmission. And has a cover member 125 that covers the rotating member 123. When a predetermined effect is performed, the rotating object 123 rotates in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal 12 has various devices (medal slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, enter button 28, select button) 29).

  The medal slot 13 is provided for receiving a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 13 are used for one game with the preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited in the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 are provided to determine the number used for one game from medals deposited in the pachislot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The enter button 28 and the select button 29 are provided to select an arbitrary item from among a plurality of selectable items on various screens displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (for example, see FIG. 128 described later). In response to pressing of the select button 29, the cursor position for designating one item among the plurality of displayed items and the item to be highlighted are changed. Also, the designated item is selected in response to pressing of the enter button 28.

  The pedestal unit 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 23 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 23 digitally stores information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as payout number) and the number of medals deposited in the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as credit number). indicate.

  At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout port 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R and the like are provided. The medal payout port 18 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 43 described later to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 18. In addition, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the production contents.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  The cabinet 2a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side opened. A main control board 41 constituting the main control circuit 91 is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls main operations of the game in the pachislot 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of presence / absence of a prize, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in the center of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  A medal payout device 43 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device 43) having a structure capable of storing a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided in the lower part of the cabinet 2a. In the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 44 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 43 (on the left side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front). The power supply device 44 supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1.

  Further, a medal auxiliary storage 45 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 43 in the cabinet 2a (on the right side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front). The medal auxiliary storage 45 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 43. The medal auxiliary storage 45 is engaged with the bottom surface of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be detachable from the cabinet 2a.

  A sub-control board 42 that constitutes a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9) described later is provided on the upper portion of the back side of the front door 2b (the part opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later.

  Further, a selector 46 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 46 is a device for selecting whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 13 is appropriate, and guides the medal determined to be appropriate to the hopper device 43. Although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 46 </ b> S (see FIG. 7) that detects that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 46.

[Display device and touch sensor module]
Next, the configuration of the liquid crystal display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 4 is a plan view of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit 11a and a frame unit 11b that surrounds the display unit 11a. The display unit 11a is formed in a horizontally long rectangle and has the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R described above. The frame part 11b is formed in a rectangular frame shape surrounding the four sides of the display part 11a.

  A touch sensor module 31 is disposed on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a (on the side opposite to the display window 4C). That is, the touch sensor module 31 is disposed at the lower right corner of the display unit 11a.

FIG. 5 is a plan view of the touch sensor module 31.
As shown in FIG. 5, the touch sensor module 31 is a surface-type capacitive touch sensor, and includes a sensor unit 32, a flexible printed board 33, and a touch sensor IC (Integrated Circuit) 34.

  The sensor unit 32 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. The sensor unit 32 includes a rectangular transparent substrate 35, electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c and a transparent conductive film provided on one surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35, and a protective cover (not shown). Examples of the material of the transparent substrate 35 include glass. The protective cover is made of a transparent material and covers the transparent conductive film and the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c.

  The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are disposed on the outer edge portion of the transparent substrate 35, and the transparent conductive film is formed in a region surrounded by the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c. The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c are electrically connected to the transparent conductive film.

  The electrode pattern 36 a is formed in an I shape and extends along one long side of the transparent substrate 35. The electrode pattern 36 b is formed in an L shape and extends along one short side and one long side of the transparent substrate 35. The electrode pattern 36 c is formed in an L shape and extends along the other short side and one long side of the transparent substrate 35. An electrode pattern is not formed on the other long side of the transparent substrate 35. That is, an electrode pattern is not formed on one side (the other long side) of the sensor unit 32.

  The flexible printed circuit board 33 is connected to one long side of the transparent substrate 35 and has a connector 33a. The connector 33a is connected to the touch sensor relay board 73 (see FIG. 7). Electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33. The touch sensor IC 34 is mounted on the flexible printed board 33.

  A uniform electric field is generated on the surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35 in the sensor unit 32. When the finger touches the surface 35a (protective cover) of the transparent substrate 35, the state of the electric field on the surface 35a changes. As a result, a weak current is generated in the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c, and the current value is output to the touch sensor IC 34. The touch sensor IC 34 detects that the finger has touched the surface 35a, the position where the finger is touching, and the finger has been released based on the current values of the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the electrode pattern 36a and the part along the one long side of the transparent substrate 35 in the electrode patterns 36b and 36c of the touch sensor module 31 oppose the right side piece of the frame portion 11b. In addition, a portion along one short side of the transparent substrate 35 in the electrode pattern 36b faces the lower piece of the frame portion 11b.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory view of the front door 2b as seen from the front. In addition, in FIG. 6, the cover member 125 of the rotary accessory unit 122 is shown transparently.
As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is exposed from the openings 100 a and 100 b of the front panel 10. The touch sensor module 31 is arranged on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a. Accordingly, a touch input unit (touch panel) 31a using the touch sensor module 31 is formed on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a.

  Electrode patterns 36a and 36b provided on one long side and one short side of the sensor portion 32 (see FIG. 4) of the touch sensor module 31 are opposed to the frame portion 11b and are covered with the front panel 10. . The electrode pattern 36c is not opposed to the frame portion 11b, but is covered by the front panel 10 (partition piece 112). And the electrode pattern is not formed in the other long side of the sensor part 32 in the touch sensor module 31.

Thereby, the electrode pattern of the touch sensor module 31 can be prevented from appearing at the boundary between the region where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the region where the touch input unit 31a is not provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the boundary between the area where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the area where the touch input unit 31a is not provided.
Hereinafter, an area where the touch input unit 31 a of the touch sensor module 31 in the display unit (display screen) 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is referred to as a sub screen 113, and other areas may be referred to as a main screen 111.

<Control system for pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachislot 1.

The pachi-slot 1 has a main control board 41 disposed in the cabinet 2a and a sub-control board 42 disposed in the front door 2b.
The main control board 41 is electrically connected to the reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power board 44b of the power supply device 44. Yes.

  The reel relay terminal plate 51 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 51 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motors. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 or when checking the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The cabinet-side relay board 53 is electrically connected to an external concentration terminal board 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet side relay board 53.

  The external concentration terminal board 56 is attached to the cabinet 2 a and is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Since the hopper device 43 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage 45. This medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 45 is full of medals.

  A power switch 44 a is connected to the power board 44 b of the power device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  To the door relay terminal board 54, a medal sensor 46S, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, and a sub relay board 67 are connected. . That is, the medal sensor 46S, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the checkout switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub relay board 67 are connected via the door relay terminal board 54. It is connected to the control board 41.

  The medal sensor 46S detects that a medal has passed through the selector 46 described above, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 (see FIG. 2) have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The stop switch substrate 65 is a substrate constituting a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 23 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 23 and an LED 69 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 69 lights, for example, a mark for displaying the start of a game or a mark for performing a replay.

  The sub relay board 67 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 42 and the main control board 41. Further, the sub relay board 67 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 42 and a plurality of boards disposed around the sub control board 42. That is, the sub relay board 67 includes the sub control board 42, the sound board 71, the LED control board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, the accessory control board 78, and the enter switch. 75 and a select switch 79 are electrically connected.

  The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub relay board 67. Further, the sub control board 42 is connected to the sound board 71, the LED control board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, the accessory control board 78, the enter via the sub relay board 67. The switch 75 and the select switch 79 are electrically connected.

  The sound board 71 outputs sound to the speakers 20L and 20R. The LED control board 72 displays the lighting pattern by turning on the head lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 showing a specific example of the light source according to the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). .

  The touch sensor relay board 73 transmits the input information output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub control circuit 101. The circuit configuration of the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 stores a history of opening / closing of the front door 2b. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101) when the front door 2b is opened.

  The accessory control board 78 controls the driving of the accessory driving unit 124 with the rotation pattern instructed by the sub control circuit 101 according to the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). The object 123 is rotated.

  The enter switch 75 detects that the enter button 28 has been pressed, and outputs the detection result to the sub control board 42 via the sub relay board 67. The select switch 79 detects that the select button 29 has been pressed and outputs the detection result to the sub control board 42 via the sub relay board 67.

  A ROM cartridge substrate 76 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 77 are connected to the sub control substrate 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing production images (video), sound, light (head lamp 21, reel lamp 22) and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 77 is a substrate that relays the wiring connecting the sub control substrate 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The main control circuit 91 includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).
The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, for example, with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) including a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is basically set to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to four symbols ahead can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a simple design.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 constituted by the sub control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a GPU (graphic processing unit) 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting and registering effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers. Is included. In addition, a drawing control task and an animation control task (see FIG. 123) for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) based on the determined effect content, and light from a light source such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 Lamp control task (see FIG. 121) for controlling the output of the sound, sound control task (see FIG. 122) for controlling the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R, and accessory control task (see FIG. 120).

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Also included are a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to the light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the GPU 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and cause the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the created video.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 20L and 20R to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the head lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the operation of the rotating combination 123 in accordance with the combination data specified by the production contents.

<Touch sensor relay circuit>
Next, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 configured by the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the touch sensor relay circuit 151.
As shown in FIG. 10, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 is electrically connected to the sub relay board 67 and the touch sensor module 31. The touch sensor relay circuit 151 determines an operation command and XY coordinate data based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31 and transmits the operation command and XY coordinate data to the sub control circuit 101 via the sub relay board 67.

  The touch sensor relay circuit 151 basically includes a touch sensor LSI (Large Scale Integration) 152, connectors 153 and 154, regulators 155 and 156, a sub control reception buffer 157, and a sub control transmission buffer 158. .

  The touch sensor LSI 152 is connected to a connector 154, a regulator 155, a sub control reception buffer 157, and a sub control transmission buffer 158. The sub control reception buffer 157 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 155, and the sub control transmission buffer 158 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 156.

  The connector 153 is electrically connected to the connector 131 mounted on the sub relay board 67. The connector 154 is electrically connected to the connector 33a of the touch sensor module 31 described above.

  The regulator 155 controls the DC (direct current) 12V power supplied via the connector 153 to a DC 3.3V power, and outputs it to the touch sensor LSI 152, the connector 154, and the sub-control reception buffer 157. Also, the regulator 156 controls the DC 12V power supplied via the connector 153 to a DC 5V power, and outputs it to the sub-control transmission buffer 158.

  The sub control reception buffer 157 temporarily stores reception data (RXD) transmitted from the sub control circuit 101 and received by the connector 153. The stored reception data is transmitted to the touch sensor LSI 152.

  The touch sensor LSI 152 performs various operation commands indicating the types of operations on the touch input unit 31a (see FIG. 6) of the touch sensor module 31 based on the touch input information supplied from the touch sensor module 31 via the connector 154. To decide. Further, XY coordinate data is determined based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31.

  The sub-control transmission buffer 158 stores various operation commands and XY coordinate data output from the touch sensor LSI 152. Then, various operation commands and XY coordinate data are transmitted as transmission data (TXD) to the sub-control circuit 101 via the connector 153.

  In this embodiment, since the touch sensor relay circuit determines the operation type and the XY coordinates based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor module, the processing related to the touch sensor module 31 performed by the sub control circuit 101 is reduced. Can do. As a result, the burden on the sub control circuit 101 when the touch sensor module 31 is mounted can be reduced.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 11) that specifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, “0” to “20” corresponding to the symbol counter are set as symbol positions in the order of advance in the reel rotation direction (arrow A direction in FIG. 11) with reference to symbol position “0”. Assigned to a symbol.

  That is, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel within the frame of the display window 4 by referring to the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table. Can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “8”, the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L within the frame of the display window 4 are respectively “ Symbols corresponding to “watermelon”, “red 7” at symbol position “8”, and “bell 1” at symbol position “7” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table defines a correspondence relationship between a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, a display combination (storage area), and a payout number.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table. It is determined that the prize is won. When it is determined that a prize is won, the player is given benefits such as medal payout and replay operation. In addition, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “lost”. That is, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the item “losing” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “losing”.

  Various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line. “Data” in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  The “storage area” data in the display combination column is data for designating a later-described display combination storage area (see FIG. 41 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 25 display combination storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and having different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the “paid-out number” data, the same number of medals are paid out.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the number of inserted medals is 3, and when any one of “C_13_BEL_A” to “C_13_BEL_AP” is determined as the display combination, 13 medals are displayed. Is paid out. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the number of inserted medals is 3, and when one of “C_14_BEL_A” to “C_14_BEL_L” is determined as the display combination, 14 medals are paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”, which are display combinations related to replay (replay) as display combinations. “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”, “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” to “C_CD_REP_I” to “C_CD_REP_I” When any one of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” is determined, replay (replay) is activated.

  Note that the display combinations related to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” shown in FIG. 15 are combinations that may be displayed when the display combinations related to “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D” cannot be established (missed). is there. The display combinations related to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” are display combinations that are triggered when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state described later.

[Bonus operating table]
Next, the bonus operation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table stores data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) provided in the main RAM 95 when a bonus operation is performed. It prescribes.

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game to be operated. In this embodiment, a middle bonus and a challenge bonus are provided as bonus game types. The middle bonus is referred to as an accessory continuous operation device related to a so-called second type special accessory, and is hereinafter referred to as “MB”. The challenge bonus is called a so-called type 2 special bonus and is hereinafter referred to as “CB”. The operation of CB is continuously performed while the operation of MB is performed.

  The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not a prescribed number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game has been reached. In the present embodiment, the operations of MB1 and MB2 that are started when “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” is displayed are terminated when medals are paid out to reach the prescribed number “13”.

  The game possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be performed in the operation of “CB”, that is, the so-called possible number of games. The operation of “CB” ends when one game is performed.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence relationship between the RT gaming state transition conditions and the transition source and destination RT gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, five types of RT0 gaming states to RT4 gaming states are provided as RT gaming states, which are different in internal winning combination of replay and their winning probabilities. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the fact that the symbol combination relating to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (the predetermined display combination is established) is the RT game. Triggers transition between states.

  Specifically, when the display combination relating to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_A”, “C_CU_REP_A”, and “C_CU_REP_B” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, when the display combination related to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, when the display combination related to “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_Oyama REP_A” to “C_Oyama REP_F” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state To do. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, when the display combination related to “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. When the display combination related to “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition of the RT gaming state with reference to the RT transition table. For details of the transition flow of the RT gaming state, More specific description will be given later with reference to FIG.

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines a correspondence relationship between the gaming state, the number of inserted medals, the internal lottery table, and the number of lotteries.

  Specifically, when in the general gaming state (MB gaming state), the internal lottery table for general gaming state is used, and “42” is set as the number of lotteries. In the present embodiment, in the MB (CB) gaming state, all small combinations (internal winning combinations related to the payout of medals) are determined as internal winning combinations. That is, the bits related to all the small combinations in the internal winning combination storing area described later are turned on. Also, the winning of “MB1” and “MB2” is invalidated.

  In the present embodiment, the general lottery state internal lottery table is used in the MB (CB) gaming state. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may have a configuration in which an internal lottery table used in the general gaming state and an internal lottery table used in the MB (CB) gaming state are provided.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, an internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer associated with the winning number in each RT gaming state and the lottery value when each winning number is determined. .

  The small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer are data obtained as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and are defined by an internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 28) described later. This is data for designating the designated internal winning combination.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each winning number. And then. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). In other words, the winning number when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digit” occurs) is won, and the data point assigned to the winning number is acquired.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which it is assigned is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

  FIG. 19 shows an internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state. The general gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the player is in the RT0 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers 1 to 42.

  In the present embodiment, lottery values are defined according to settings 1 to 6. These settings 1 to 6 are provided in order to adjust the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small roles at the game store side. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key type switch (not shown) It is changed using.

  For example, referring to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the probability that the winning number “1” (abbreviation “F_NMLRP1”) in setting 6 is 7000/65536. When the winning number “1” is won, “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer. Note that “1” in the small role / replay data pointer corresponds to the abbreviations “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”.

  Further, in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the winning numbers “12” (abbreviation “F_R1_R2_KP”), “13” (abbreviation “F_R1_KP_R2”), “19” (abbreviation “F_KP_R4_R2_1”) to “22” (abbreviation “F_KP_R2_R2_2”). The lottery value of “)” is “0”. Therefore, when referring to the internal lottery table for general gaming state, the winning numbers “12”, “13”, “19” to “22” are not won.

  When the winning numbers “12”, “13”, “19” to “22” are won, “12”, “13”, “19” to “22” are acquired as the small role / replay data pointers, Internal winning combinations relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are determined (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” is not determined, and the RT0 gaming state is not shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 20 shows an internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT1 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “24”. In the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number in the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. The lottery value is defined according to “1” to “24”.

  For example, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “19” and “21” are “3750”, respectively. As described above, when any of the small role / replay data pointers “19” to “22” defined according to the winning numbers “19” to “22” is acquired, “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are acquired. Internal winning combination related to is determined. Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined, and the RT1 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 21 shows an internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT2 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “24”. In the case of the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “24” of the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table. The lottery value is defined according to “1” to “24”.

  For example, in the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “14” and “16” are “10000”, and the lottery values of the winning numbers “15” and “17” are “6000”, respectively. It is. The lottery value of the winning number “18” is “10846”.

  When any of the small role / replay data pointers “14” to “18” defined according to the winning numbers “14” to “18” is acquired, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to The internal winning combination relating to “C_SBB_D” is determined (see FIG. 25). Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination relating to “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” may be determined, and the transition from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state may occur. There is.

  FIG. 22 shows an internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT3 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “24”. In the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “24” of the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. The lottery value is defined according to “1” to “24”.

  For example, in the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “20” and “22” are “5000”, respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers “23” and “24” are “8000”, respectively. It is. When any of the small role / replay data pointers “20” and “22” to “24” defined according to the winning numbers “20” and “22” to “24” is acquired, “C_small Internal winning combinations relating to “V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” are determined (see FIG. 26). Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination relating to “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may be shifted to the RT4 gaming state. .

  When the small combination / replay data pointers “20” and “22” defined according to the winning numbers “20” and “22” are acquired, the internal winning combinations related to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are obtained. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may be shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state. This RT4 gaming state internal lottery table is a table referred to in the RT4 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “24”. In the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number in the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state. The lottery value is defined according to “1” to “24”.

  For example, in the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “12” and “13” are “13000”, respectively. When the small combination / replay data pointers “12” and “13” defined according to the winning numbers “12” and “13” are acquired, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” is determined. The Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT1 gaming state.

  Further, when the small role / replay data pointers “12” and “13” defined according to the winning numbers “12” and “13” are acquired, the internal winning combinations related to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are obtained. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may be shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  The winning numbers “28” to “33” in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 19 may win in any gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Each is “2930”. When the small combination / replay data pointers “28” to “33” defined according to the winning numbers “28” to “33” are acquired, the internal winning combination relating to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” is determined. The

  Therefore, the internal winning combination relating to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” may be determined in any of the gaming states of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT0 gaming state.

[Internal winning combination determination table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

  The “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R that is permitted to be displayed along the active line. The “internal winning combination” is represented by 1-byte data in the same way as the “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. Are assigned. The “O” mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer.

  When the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are “0”, the content of the “internal winning combination” is “losing”, which is the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. Indicates that display of all symbol combinations specified by is not permitted.

  FIG. 24 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines an internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game for the bonus data pointer “1”. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 24, for example, when “1” is acquired as the bonus data pointer, “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” are won as internal winning combinations.

  25 to 28 show a small combination / replay internal winning combination determination table. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determining table defines internal winning combinations related to small winning combination and replay (replay) for the small winning combination / replay data pointers “1” to “42”. That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

  For example, when “17” is acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_C_REP”, “C_Oyama_REP_A” to “C_Oyama” are used as internal winning combinations. “_REP_F” is won in duplicate. In addition, when “18” is acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_Oyama” are used as internal winning combinations. “_REP_A” to “C_Oyama_REP_F” and “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” are duplicated.

[Cylinder stop number selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table will be described. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The rotation stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

  The spinning cylinder stop number selection table of this embodiment defines a different spinning cylinder stop number for each data pointer. For example, when the data pointer for the small role / replay is “3”, the spinning stop number “3” is selected. When the bonus data pointer is “1”, the spinning stop number “67” is selected.

  29 in the spinning cylinder stop number selection table shown in FIG. 29 is in the MB gaming state (CB gaming state), and the small role / replay data pointer is “0”, “25 to 41”. Show the case. In this case, the rotating cylinder stop number “42” is selected. In addition, 1 and 2 of US marks in the spinning cylinder stop number selection table shown in FIG. 29 indicate a case in the MB gaming state (CB gaming state). For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “1” during the MB gaming state, the spinning stop number “43” is selected.

  In addition, although the number selection table for rotation stop of this embodiment prescribes | regulates a different rotation stop number for every data pointer for small roles and replays, this invention is not limited to this. In the spinning stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same spinning stop number may be defined for different small role / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initial setting table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines a correspondence relationship between the rotation stop number and various data used in a pull-in priority table selection process described later and a number of sliding pieces determination process of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes the rotation stop number, the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the forward push table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push push The correspondence relationship between the table change initial data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is defined.

  The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used for the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, in the reel stop initial setting table, if a pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning stop number is defined, it corresponds to the pull-in priority table number defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37). Data relating to the priority order of the display combination can be acquired.

  Further, if the drawing priority table number corresponding to the number for turning stop is not defined in the reel stop initial setting table, the drawing priority table selection is made with reference to the drawing priority table selection table (see FIG. 36). A pull-in priority table number corresponding to the table number is determined.

  The forward push table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push table change initial data are used to specify a stop table (see FIGS. 32 to 34) to be referred to when the forward push is performed. It is data. The “forward push” in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed on the left reel 3L. This corresponds to the pressing order (stop order) of “right” and “middle left and right”. In the present embodiment, for example, when the display in the liquid crystal display device 11 and the output of sound from the speakers 20L and 20R, or the push order (stop order) performed in combination thereof is not notified. Stop operation by pushing forward is recommended.

  The irregular pressing time table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 35) to be referred to when irregular pressing is performed. In this embodiment, “anomalous push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is “middle left / right”, “middle right / left”, “middle right”. This corresponds to the pressing order of “left” and “middle right”.

  In the present embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, one of the number of sliding symbols “0” to “4” is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value obtained corresponds to the value obtained. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the reel rotation stops (this is referred to as “scheduled stop position”). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel starts to be stopped, and this is referred to as a “stop start position”.

  In other words, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. In other words, the number of symbols passing through the middle stage area of the corresponding reel of the display window 4 in the period from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

  Referring to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is a tentative one, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the planned stop position of the reel.

  In the present embodiment, when there is an appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on a stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), a pull-in priority table described later The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to (see FIG. 37). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to in order to determine the search order when the priorities are compared for each of the symbols from the stop start position to the 4th symbol position that is the maximum number of sliding symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referenced is properly used according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of the forward push, the first stop table (see FIG. 32) at the time of the forward push and the second and third stop stop tables (see FIG. 34) at the time of the forward push are referred to. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the irregular pressing stop table (see FIG. 35) is referred.

[Stop table for first stop when pushing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first stop table for forward pressing will be described. The forward stop first stop table shown in FIG. 32 is referred to when the forward push table selection data is “01”. The first stop table at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence relationship between the stop start positions “0” to “20” of the left reel 3L, the number of sliding pieces determination data, and the change status.

  For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the number-of-sliding piece determination data is “0”, and the change status is “1”. The change status is used when referring to a forward pressing control change table (see FIG. 33) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the forward pressing control change table will be described. The forward pressing control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table (see FIG. 32) at the time of the forward press is “1” and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the change status is “ The stop table number for the second and third stops is “12” at the time of forward pressing.
In the forward push control change table, if the change status and the second and third stop stop table numbers for forward push are not registered in the target position, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops and the stop table for irregularity when pushing forward define 1-byte stop data according to each of the symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  34 is referred to when the second / third stop table for stoppage is “08”. The irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 35 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is “07”.

  In the stop data specified by the stop tables of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity, is the symbol position associated with the stop data appropriate as the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped? Has information on whether or not. The stop data includes information indicating whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the “A line” column and the “B line” column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. The stop data is defined by assigning information about which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bit corresponding to the “line change” column in each stop table.

  In other words, the second and third stop tables for stoppages and the stop table for anomalies at the time of forward pressing define a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be varied based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to compress information.

  The determination of the number of sliding piece determination data is performed as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, a column of “middle reel A line data” of bit 4 is designated.

  Then, referring to the designated bit string, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not “1” is defined as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position where “1” is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and this difference is used as the number of sliding piece determination data.

  Whether or not the bit string to be referred to is changed from the “A line” column to the “B line” column refers to the “line change” column and “1” is defined in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not. When it is determined that the line is to be changed, the column “B line” is designated thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority table selection table number and stop button pressing order, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination.
The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information related to the priority order of display combinations defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37).

  When the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time, the data in the “left reel first stop” column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time and the drawing priority table selection table number is “1”, “00” is acquired as the drawing priority table number. Even when the middle reel 3C is pressed in the second stop and when the right reel 3R is pressed in the second stop, “00” is maintained as the pull-in priority table number.

  Further, in the pull-in priority table selection table, when the pull-in priority table number is not registered at the target position, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the pull-in priority table number. Get as. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the drawing priority table selection table number is “0”, the drawing priority table number is not registered at the target position. Therefore, in this case, the right column of the first reel first stop column corresponding to the pull-in priority table selection table number “0” is referred to, and “00” is acquired as the pull-in priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the drawing priority table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-in priority table numbers “00” to “04”.

  The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) between the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Each pull-in data is similar to “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 24 to 28 and “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. It is represented by byte data, and a unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the one-byte data.

  In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-described first stop table for first stop (see FIG. 32). However, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. In other words, in the present embodiment, a more appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that allow the stop display by the internal winning combination regardless of the number of sliding symbols acquired from the stop table.

  In the present embodiment, the stop display (withdrawal) of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the higher priority is prioritized over the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the lower priority. To be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, not only the priority order of the internal winning combination differs depending on the pull-in priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table numbers are “01”, “03”, and “04”, the priority number is set to 3, and the pull-in priority table numbers are “00” and “02”. In this case, the number of priority divisions is 1.

Here, in order to simplify the description, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is “01” will be described, and description of priorities in other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted.
The priority order “1” when the pull-in priority table number is “01” includes “C_BAR_A”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, and “C_3_BEL_C1” to “_C_4”. The pull-in data corresponding to is defined.

  The priority “2” when the pull-in priority table number is “01” includes “C_BAR_B”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_C”, and “C_B_REP_H” to “C_B_REP_J”. Data is specified.

  The priority “3” when the pull-in priority table number is “01” includes “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”, “C_BAR_C” to “C_BAR_E”, “C_B_REP_D” to “C_B_REP_G”, and “C_B_REP_K”. -Withdrawal data corresponding to "C_B_REP_P" is defined.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIG. The search order table preferentially applies from the range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding frames (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding frames is 4) (hereinafter referred to as “search order”). ").

  The search order table defines the sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the stop table and the search order. That is, in this embodiment, the order of numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the sliding piece number determination data. In addition, the search order table is provided assuming that there are a plurality of sliding frames having the same priority, and the search order table is applied in a higher order.

  In this embodiment, as will be described in the priority attraction-in control process of FIG. 93 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table, and the search order “1” is supported. The number of sliding frames is preferentially applied from the numerical value to be used.

[Game lock lottery table]
Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.
The game lock lottery table defines the lottery value of the game lock according to the winning number related to the internal lottery in the RT4 gaming state. The game lock in the present embodiment is generated during the game. Specifically, when a start operation (pressing operation on the start lever 16) is detected, the occurrence of a game lock is lottery, and when the occurrence of a game lock is determined, a game lock is generated. While the game lock is occurring, even if a closing operation or a stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

  In the game lock lottery processing of the present embodiment, basically, a random number value for production (random number denominator = 65536) extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is subtracted by a prescribed lottery value. To do. And then. The lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). That is, the player has won the game lock when the subtraction result is less than 0.

In the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39, when the winning numbers are “36” (abbreviation “F_strong angle check”) to “41” (abbreviation “F_reach eyes”), the lottery value to which the game lock is won. Is specified. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the winning numbers are “33” to “41”, it is determined whether to perform the game lock. For example, when the winning number is “37” (abbreviation “F_middle stage”), the game lock is won (executed) with a probability of 32768/65536.

[Pattern winning action flag data table]
Next, the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the winning determination line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table, the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time can be determined. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15).

  For example, when the symbol “lip” is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 25 corresponding to the symbol code “00000001” (lip) in the reel type “left”. “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. Data defined in the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is logically AND stored with data stored in a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) described later.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 95 is also provided with storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters and the like used for the various reel effects described above.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 1 to 26 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 26, when a predetermined bit is set to “1” (stored), a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the active line. Indicates. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line.

  The main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area (not shown). The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display winning combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 26, when “1” stands for a plurality of bits, display of a combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “lost”.

  The main RAM 95 is provided with a carryover combination storage area (not shown). When “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” are determined as the internal winning combination as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination is stored as a carryover combination in the carryover combination storage area. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, “Lip”-“Lip”-“Bell 2” of “C_MB1”) is displayed on the winning determination line. Retained. While the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The gaming state flag storage area is composed of gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

  In each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, when “1” is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Indicates. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, the MB (“C_MB1” or “C_MB2”) is being operated, and the MB gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has been pressed this time, that is, an operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 93 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of stop button pressing order is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol code storage area stores, for each active line, the symbol code (symbol code storage region 1) of the symbol of the reel that was most recently stopped and the displayable symbols (symbol code storage regions 2 to 29). The After all the reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 26.

  In this embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 40), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Retrieve priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area. That is, in the pull-in priority data storage area, a priority data storage area is provided for each reel type.

  Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “20” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table described above.

  The contents of the priority level pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority level data storage area differ depending on the type of the pull-in priority level table number in the pull-in priority level table (see FIG. 37) referred to when determining the pull-in priority level data. . The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-described search order table (see FIG. 38).

  Although detailed description is omitted in the present specification, various table data (for example, a navigation table) necessary for various rendering operations are also stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76, and various types of necessary data are also stored in the sub RAM 103. A storage area is provided as appropriate.

<Game state transition flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a transition flow of the gaming state between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state” and “BB gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of game states of “RT0 game state” to “RT4 game state” are provided as RT game states. Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and controls the transition between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT4 gaming state”.

First, at the time of shipment, the gaming state becomes “RT0 gaming state”. Next, in the “RT0 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “Bell spilling eyes” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT1 gaming state”. In addition, in the “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the combination of symbols related to “Bell spilling eyes” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state is “RT1 gaming state” ”.
“Bell spilled eyes” in the present embodiment are display roles of “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in the “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip A” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT1 gaming state”.
“Push order lip A” in the present embodiment is a display role of “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” shown in FIG.

In the “RT1 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT2 gaming state”. In addition, in the “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT2 gaming state”.
“Push order lip B” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” illustrated in FIG. 13.

In the “RT2 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “BB / RB lip” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT3 gaming state”.
“BB / RB Lip” in the present embodiment is a display role of “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z” and “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” shown in FIG.

In the “RT3 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip C” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT4 gaming state”. Also, in the “RT1 gaming state” or “RT2 gaming state”, when the combination of symbols related to “push order lip C” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT4 gaming state”.
“Push order lip C” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” shown in FIG.

In the “RT1 gaming state”, “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “lower bell” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state is “ Transition to “RT0 gaming state”.
The “lower bell” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E” shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the first ART is executed when in the “RT3 gaming state”, and the second ART is executed when in the “RT4 gaming state”. The “RT3 gaming state” is shifted to the case where the display combination of “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” is established during the RT2 gaming state. For example, the symbol combination related to “C_BNS_A” is “red 7” − “red 7” − “red 7”. That is, there is a combination of symbols based on a design based on the number “7”, which is usually adopted as a symbol combination related to the operation of the bonus (other than this, it may be a design having better visibility than other symbols). When the stop display is made, the gaming state shifts to “RT3 gaming state”, and the first ART is executed. Therefore, the first ART executed during the RT3 gaming state is referred to as a “pseudo bonus”.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT1 gaming state, when the execution of the first ART is determined, the stop order (display assistance) for displaying the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” on the winning determination line. Information), and waits for the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” to be displayed on the winning determination line. Thereafter, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT2 gaming state”.

  In the “RT2 gaming state”, display auxiliary information for displaying the symbol combination related to “BB / RB lip” on the winning determination line is notified. Thereafter, when the symbol combination related to “BB / RB lip” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from “RT2 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state”. As a result, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution of the second ART is determined in the “RT1 gaming state”, “RT2 gaming state”, or “RT3 gaming state”, the symbol related to “push order lip C” is displayed. The stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination on the winning determination line is notified. And it waits for the combination of the symbol which concerns on "push order lip C" to be displayed on a winning determination line. Thereafter, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip C” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT4 gaming state”. As a result, the second ART (pseudo bonus) is executed.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 48 is a correspondence table between internal winning combinations and stop orders, and shows the types of display combinations corresponding to the stop orders.

  “C_CU_REP” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined. “C_CD_REP” indicates a display combination (“C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I”) in which the transition to the RT2 gaming state is determined. In addition, “normal lip” indicates a display combination (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) related to re-playing regardless of the transition of the game state.

  Furthermore, “C_BNS” indicates a display combination (“C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. Note that “C_BNS * 1” is most easily displayed when stop control is performed using the stop table, and “C_BNS_O” to “C_BNS_T” are not displayed. In addition, “C_BNS * 2” is most easily displayed when stop control using the stop table is performed, and “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_N” and “C_BNS_U” to “C_BNS_Z” are not displayed.

  “C_SBB” indicates a display combination (“C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. “C_Small V” indicates a display combination (“C_Small V_REP_A” to “C_Small V_REP_C”) in which the transition to the RT4 gaming state (second ART) is determined.

  “C_3_BEL” indicates display combinations (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”) that are not involved in the transition of the gaming state. When “C_3_BEL” is established, three medals are paid out. Similar to “C_3_BEL”, “C_9_BEL” indicates display combinations (“C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”) that are not related to the transition of the gaming state. When “C_9_BEL” is established, nine medals are paid out.

  “C_ONE” indicates a display combination (“C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) in which the transition to the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is determined. “C_HAZ” indicates a display combination (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined.

  “C_13_BEL” indicates display combinations not related to the game state transition (“C_13_BEL_A” to “C_13_BEL_AP”), and “C_14_BEL” indicates display combinations not related to the game state transition (“C_14_BEL_A” to “ C_14_BEL_K "). When “C_13_BEL” is established, 13 medals are paid out, and when “C_14_BEL” is established, 14 medals are paid out.

  During the MB gaming state, either “C_13_BEL” or “C_14_BEL” can be established, and the game ends when more than 13 medals are paid out. For example, when “C_14_BEL” is established in the first game in the MB gaming state, the MB gaming state is terminated in that game. As a result, the player obtains 11 medals (14 (paid-out number) -3 (inserted number) = 11 (acquired number)).

  On the other hand, when “C_13_BEL” is established in the first game and “C_14_BEL” is established in the second game in the MB gaming state, the player has 21 cards (27 (payout number) −6 (inserted number) = 21 ( The number of medals))) can be obtained. In the MB gaming state, the winning number “1” (rotation stop number “43”), “4” (rotation stop number “46”), “19” (rotation stop number “61”) , “21” (rotation stop number “63”) is determined, “C — 14_BEL” is established in the first game.

  In the present embodiment, a combination of various symbols related to replays such as “C_CU_REP”, “C_CD_REP”, and a combination of various symbols related to “Bell” such as “C_ONE”, “C_3_BEL”, “C_9_BEL”, etc. The order of pushing (stop order) is set for each success or failure of the stop display.

  For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “12”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B” and “C_CU_REP_B” “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are won. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “12”, “12” is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, “C_CU_REP” (“C_CU_REP_A” is provided on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “middle left / right” or “middle left / right”.
”Or“ C_CU_REP_B ”) is stopped and displayed.
Further, the combination of symbols related to “C_CD_REP” (any one of “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right” or “middle right and left”.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to “normal lip” (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) is stopped and displayed on the condition that the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left”. Is done.

In the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “14”, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_J”, “C_BNS_O” to “C_B”
NS_T ”,“ C_BNS_Y ”,“ C_C_REP ”,“ C_B_REP_A ”to“ C_B_REP_P ”,“ C_small V_REP_A ”to“ C_small V_REP_F ”are won. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “14”, “14” is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, “normal lip” (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) is provided on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “middle left / right” or “middle right / left”. Any combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to any of “C_BNS * 1” (“C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_J”, “C_BNS_Y”) is stopped on the condition that the stop order is “middle left / right” and “middle left / right”. Is displayed.
Further, if the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left” and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (correct answer), any of “C_BNS * 2” (“C_BNS_O” to “C_BNS_T”) The combination of symbols related to ()) is stopped and displayed. When the timing of the stop operation is not a predetermined timing (correct answer), the symbol combinations related to “C_Oyama REP_A” to “C_Oyama REP_F” are stopped and displayed.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “25”, “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B” “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”, “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E” are won. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “25”, “25” is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, “C_3_BEL” (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1”) is provided on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “left middle right” or “right and left middle”. (Any one of “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”) is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to “C_9_BEL” (any one of “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right” and “middle right and left”.
Further, the combination of symbols related to “C_ONE” (any one of “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”.

In the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “28”, “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_CHN_A”, “C_ONE_A” ~ "C_ONE_E"
Will win. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “28”, “28” is determined as the rotation stop number.

  In this case, if the stop order by the pressing operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “left middle right” or “middle left and right”, and the pressing timing of the stop button for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer). , “C_3_BEL” (any one of “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”) is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, if the stop order is “middle left” or “middle left and right” and the pressing timing of the stop button for the rotating reel is other than a predetermined timing (incorrect answer), “C_HAZ” (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” The combination of symbols related to "any of the above" is stopped and displayed. As a result, medals are not paid out.

  Therefore, when the stop order is “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing (correct answer), three medals are paid out. If the stop button is pressed at a timing other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the medal is not paid out.

In addition, the combination of symbols related to “C_9_BEL” (any one of “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right” and “middle right and left”. As a result, nine medals are paid out.
Further, the combination of symbols related to “C_ONE” (any one of “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”. As a result, one medal is paid out.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition will be described.
FIG. 49 is a correspondence table of the internal winning combination, stop order, and RT transition, and shows the transition destination of the RT gaming state according to the stop order.

  In the non-MB game state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “12”, the symbol related to “normal lip” is provided on the condition that the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left”. The combination is stopped. Thereby, the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed.

  For example, in the RT4 gaming state (second ART), if the end of the RT4 gaming state has not been determined, a notification is made that the stop order should be “right middle left” or “right middle left” (display auxiliary information) To do. As a result, the symbol combination related to “normal lip” is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained. In other words, it is notified that the stop order should be “middle right / left” or “middle right / left” so as not to shift from the RT4 gaming state (second ART) to another RT gaming state.

  In the non-MB game state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “14”, “C_BNS (* 1)” is set on condition that the stop order is “middle left / right” or “middle left / right”. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “BB flag” or “BB preparing flag” described later is on, the stop order is “left middle right” or “left and right It is notified that “middle” should be set, and that “red 7”-“red 7”-“red 7” symbol combination stop display should be aimed (display auxiliary information). Thereby, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS (* 1)” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 1)” (the symbol combination reminiscent of BB), the stop order should be “left middle right” or “right and left middle”, and “ It notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the symbol combination of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 1)” is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 102 starts the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is BB.

  On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “RB flag” or “RB preparation flag” to be described later is on, the stop order is “right left middle” or “right middle “Left” should be notified, and “Red 7”-“Red 7”-“Red 7” symbols should be stopped (display auxiliary information). Thereby, the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 2)” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 2)” (the symbol combination reminiscent of RB), the stop order should be “right left middle” or “right middle left” and “ It notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the symbol combination of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 2)” is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 102 starts the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is RB.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “18”, the combination of symbols related to “C_SBB” on the condition that the stop order is “left middle right” or “left middle right” Is stopped. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “SBB flag” or “SBB preparing flag” described later is on, the stop order is “left middle right” or “left and right (Display auxiliary information) is notified that it should be set to “medium” and that it is desirable to stop display of the combination of symbols “white 7”-“white 7”-“white 7”. Thereby, the symbol combination related to “C_SBB” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_SBB” (the symbol combination reminiscent of SBB), it is preferable to set the stop order to “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, and “white 7” − It notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”.

  On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “SBB flag” or “SBB preparation flag” is OFF, the stop order is set to “middle left / right” or “middle right / left” Then, a message to the effect (display auxiliary information) is notified. As a result, the combination of symbols related to “normal lip” is stopped and displayed, and the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed. That is, it notifies that the stop order should be “middle left / right” or “middle right / left” in order not to stop and display the combination of symbols related to “C_SBB” (the combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB).

<Description of sub game state>
Here, the sub gaming state will be described.
In the present embodiment, various game states related to effects controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) are referred to as “sub game states”. In this embodiment, as the sub game state, the general state, CZ (chance zone), first ART (pseudo bonus), second ART, in preparation for ART (the second ART starts after the end of the first ART) BR (Battle Rush) and the flag are set between the time when the first ART is finished and the time when the second ART is started).

  When the second ART (ART) is won by the ART lottery performed during the BB in the first ART (pseudo bonus) (hereinafter referred to as “non-ART BB”), after the first ART ends, 2 ART is started. The ART preparation period is a gaming period until the RT gaming state (RT3 gaming state) after the end of the first ART shifts to the RT4 gaming state in order to start the second ART. Specifically, when the display combination relating to the specific internal winning combination (“C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C”) is established during the ART preparation, the ART preparation is completed and the second ART Is started.

[General status]
The general state is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state. During this general state, basically, a lottery (CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to CZ is performed with reference to a CZ (chance zone) lottery table (see FIG. 50) described later for each game (game). Is called. When the transition to CZ is determined, lottery for determining the number of precursor games (hereinafter referred to as “the number of CZ precursor games”) until the transition to CZ is performed.

  Note that as the pachislot machine of the present invention, a CZ lottery table in which the number of precursor games until the shift to CZ is lottered simultaneously with the lottery of whether or not to shift to CZ may be used. That is, whether to shift to CZ and the number of CZ precursor games when shifting to CZ may be determined by one lottery.

[CZ (Chance Zone)]
CZ is a sub gaming state executed during the RT0 gaming state and during the RT1 gaming state. When the transition of CZ is determined in the general state and the game of the number of CZ precursor games is consumed, the sub gaming state is shifted from the general state to CZ. Then, after the transition to CZ, notification that it is better to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) (hereinafter referred to as “navigating to the black BAR”) Is performed a predetermined number of times, CZ is terminated.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ, execution of the first ART is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the first ART is determined when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) is consumed before the “navigating for black BAR” is performed a prescribed number of times.

  In the present embodiment, “CZ1” and “CZ2” are provided as CZ. In “CZ1”, “4” is set as the prescribed number of times of “navigating to aim at the black BAR”. That is, “CZ1” ends when “navigating to the black BAR” is performed four times. On the other hand, in “CZ2”, “10” is set as the specified number of times of “navigating to the black BAR”. That is, “CZ2” ends when “navigating to the black BAR” is performed ten times. Note that the number of times “CZ1” and “CZ2” “navigating to the black BAR” is managed by the CZ cut-in number counter.

  In “CZ1” and “CZ2”, when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability of executing “navigating to the black BAR” is the same. The probability of executing “aiming for black BAR and navigating” when the specific internal winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination is also the same. Therefore, “CZ2”, which has a larger number of prescribed “navigating for black BAR”, is more likely to be determined to execute the first ART than “CZ1”.

  “CZ2” may have a higher probability of winning a bonus in bonus lottery than “CZ1”. In addition, as “CZ2” according to the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, the probability that a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is won is higher than “CZ1”.

[First ART]
The first ART is a sub gaming state executed during the RT3 gaming state, and is a so-called pseudo bonus. For example, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined when a bonus is won by bonus lottery during the general state, during CZ, during the first ART, and during the second ART. Further, it is determined when a combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ.

  Further, the first ART is determined when the number of bonus winning games determined in advance by lottery is exhausted after the end of the first ART. The number of games determined in advance by lottery is set in the bonus winning game number counter. The value of the bonus winning game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game (game) performed after the end of the first ART. When the bonus winning game number counter becomes “0”, the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined.

  When the second ART is started after the end of the first ART, the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted from the game in the second ART. In addition, if a bonus is won by bonus lottery before the value of the bonus winning game number counter becomes “0” or if a bonus winning is determined during CZ, a new bonus winning game number is determined by lottery. Is done.

  The first ART (pseudo bonus) is classified into three types: RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus), and SBB (super big bonus). In the present embodiment, when the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined, one of RB, BB, and SBB is determined by lottery.

  RB, BB, and SBB differ in the number of stay games (hereinafter referred to as “first ART start G (game) number”). In the present embodiment, the first ART start G number when the type of pseudo bonus is RB is determined to be “30”. Further, the first ART start G number in the case of BB is determined to be “60”, and the first ART start G number in the case of SBB is determined to be “100”.

  The “first ART start G number” determined according to the type of the pseudo bonus is set in the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter. The value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game in the first ART (pseudo bonus). The first ART (pseudo bonus) ends when the value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter becomes “0”.

  The first ART is started after the game of the number of the first ART precursor games determined by lottery is digested and the game in preparation is completed. In the first ART precursor game, an effect is provided to notify whether or not the first ART (pseudo bonus) has been won. If the player wins the first ART and the type is BB or SBB, the game during the BB preparation is performed after the end of the first ART precursor game. On the other hand, when the type of the first ART is RB, the game during the RB preparation is performed after the end of the first ART precursor game.

  In the game during the BB preparation in which the type of the pseudo bonus determined is BB, in order to display the combination stop of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state (“normal lip”). The stop order is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “14” to “17”, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS (* 1)” described above (the combination of symbols reminiscent of BB) is stopped. The stop order for display is notified. When the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 1)” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is BB is started.

  In the game during the BB preparation in which the determined type of the pseudo bonus is SBB, in order to display the combination stop of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state (“normal lip”). The stop order is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “18”, the stop order for stopping and displaying the symbol combination (symbol recalling SBB) related to “C_SBB” described above is notified. Is done. Then, when the symbol combination related to “C_SBB” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is SBB is started.

  In the RB preparation game, the stop order for displaying the combination stop of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state (“normal lip”) is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “14” to “17”, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS * 2” (the combination of symbols reminiscent of RB) is stopped and displayed. The stop order for notification is notified. When the symbol combination related to “C_BNS * 2” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is RB is started.

  During the first ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is a predetermined winning number, the stop order is notified. For example, in the case of a non-MB gaming state, when the winning number related to the internal winning is “25” in the first ART, that is, when the rotation stop number “25” (see FIG. 48) is selected. Is notified of the stop order (“middle left / right” or “middle right / left”) in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed so that a relatively large number of medals are paid out. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, a symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed, and nine medals are paid out. In the case of the non-MB gaming state, when the sub gaming state is the general state and the winning number related to the internal winning is “25”, the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed Will not be notified. Therefore, when the player performs a stop operation with the recommended forward push (“left middle right” or “left and right middle”) in the general state, a symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_3_BEL” is displayed. Medals are paid out. Therefore, the player who performs the stop operation according to the stop order notified during the first ART can obtain more medals than in the general state.

[Second ART]
The second ART is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT4 gaming state. For example, the second ART is executed by an ART lottery during the BB in the first ART (pseudo bonus) that is started by winning other than during the second ART (hereinafter referred to as “BB during non-ART”). Determined if ART wins. When winning of the second ART is determined, “50” is determined as the number of staying games of the second ART (hereinafter, “second ART start G (game) number”). “50” which is the “second ART start G number” is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game in the second ART.

  The second ART is started after a game of the number of the second ART precursor games determined by lottery is digested and an ART preparation game is passed. In the second ART precursor game, an effect is provided to notify whether or not the second ART has been won. If the second ART is won, the ART preparing game is played after the second ART precursor game is completed.

  In the ART preparing game, the stop order for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to “C_small V” described above is notified. When the symbol combination related to “C_small V” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state, and the second ART is started.

  During the second ART, as in the first ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is a predetermined winning number, the stop order is notified. For example, in the case of a non-MB game state, when the winning number related to the internal winning is “25” in the second ART, that is, when the rotation stop number “25” (see FIG. 48) is selected. Is notified of the stop order (“middle left / right” or “middle right / left”) in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed so that a relatively large number of medals are paid out. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, a symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed, and nine medals are paid out. In the non-MB gaming state, when the sub gaming state is the general state and the winning number related to the internal winning is “25”, the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed Will not be notified. Therefore, a player who performs a stop operation in accordance with the stop order notified during the second ART can obtain more medals than in the general state.

  In the second ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is the winning number corresponding to the internal winning combination relating to the transition or maintenance of the RT state, for example, “C_CU_REP”, “C_CD_REP”, “normal lip”, etc. In order to shift from the RT4 state to another RT state, or to maintain the RT4 gaming state, the player may be notified of the push order. For example, in the case of a non-MB gaming state, in the second ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is “12”, that is, when the rotation stop number “12” (see FIG. 48) is selected, When the RT4 state is maintained, the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “normal lip” is displayed (that is, “right middle left” or “right middle left”) is notified. When the player performs a stop operation according to the notified stop order, the symbol combination related to “normal lip” is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  In the second ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is not a predetermined winning number, the stop order is not notified. For example, in the case of a non-MB gaming state, when the winning number related to the internal winning is “34” to “42” in the second ART, the stop order is not notified.

  In addition, in the second ART, the number of games added for each game (game) is referred to, and the number of added games is lottery (the number of added games is lottery), and the determined number of added games is determined as the number of ART games. Add to the counter. That is, as the number of additional games is determined in the second ART, the number of ART games increases, and the second ART advantageous to the player can be continued for a long time.

  When the value of the ART game number counter becomes “0”, an ART pullback process is performed. In the ART pullback process, a so-called pullback is performed in which “50” is set again in the ART game number counter with a predetermined probability. The predetermined probability can be arbitrarily set, but is set to 1% or less in the present embodiment.

  In a game that is played after the pull-back process in the ART pull-back process and before a predetermined winning number for notifying the stop order is won, the stop operation is performed by pressing forward ("left middle right" and "middle left and right"). As long as it is performed, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted. After the withdrawal is performed, the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game from the game next to the game where the predetermined winning number (see FIGS. 29 and 48) for which the stop order is notified is won. The Note that even if the game does not subtract the value of the ART game number counter, a lottery of the number of additional games is performed.

  In addition, when a stop operation is performed in a stop order other than a forward push in a game that is performed until a predetermined winning number for notifying the stop order is won after the pull back is performed in the ART pull back process, The value of the ART game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game from the game after the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward press. The details of the ART pullback process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[BR (Battle Rush)]
BR (Battle Rush) is a sub gaming state related to an effect in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is expected, and is executed during the second ART. Whether or not to execute this BR is determined for each game during BB (hereinafter referred to as “BB during ART”) in the first ART (pseudo bonus) started by winning during the second ART. To be done. Further, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted during the period of executing BR.

  In BR, BR continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games (“10” in the present embodiment), and when BR continuation is determined, an extra G (game) number lottery for lottering the addition (addition) number of ART games is determined. Do. The number of extra games determined by the extra G number lottery is notified in the last game (tenth game) of the predetermined number of games. The determined number of added games is added to the ART game number counter.

  Further, if the number of times BR continuation is determined (BR continuation number) satisfies a specific number (in this embodiment, n times “5” (n = 1, 2, 3...)), The additional G number. A separate lottery G (game) number lottery is performed separately from the lottery.

  As the additional extra G number lottery of the present embodiment, five types of “additional extra A”, “additional extra B”, “additional extra C1”, “additional extra C2” and “additional extra C3” are provided. When the additional extra G number lottery is performed, the type of additional extra G number lottery is determined by the additional extra lottery during BR, and the additional game number is determined by the determined additional extra G number lottery.

  The determination and notification of the number of additional games by the additional additional G number lottery is performed by a game of a special number of games (in this embodiment, “2”) that is performed after a predetermined number of games have been completed. Further, the additional game number determined by the additional additional G number lottery is added to the additional game number counter. When a game with a special number of games is completed, a game with a predetermined number of games is started. If BR continuation is determined, the determined number of additional games is notified in the last game with the predetermined number of games. The

  In this way, in BR, when the number of ART games to be added (added) is determined, there is an opportunity to add the next number of ART games after a predetermined number of games. Thereby, the interest regarding the determination of the addition of the number of ART games can be continued, and the interest of the game can be improved for a long time.

  In addition, in a game with a predetermined number of games in BR, it is possible to perform an effect that expects the addition of the number of ART games to continue. As a result, the player's expectation of obtaining an advantageous privilege (addition of the number of ART games) is maintained, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, since the continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games, the result of the continuous lottery can be suggested in the game of the predetermined number of games. That is, the result of the continuous lottery can be suggested using a continuous performance performed over a plurality of games. Thereby, even if the game in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is not determined continues, the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is determined is equal to or greater than the specified number (“20” in the present embodiment), the first ART (pseudo bonus) is won as a bonus, and BR (battle) The start of rush is determined. Thereby, the feeling of expectation other than grant of the number of additional games can be included in the result of the continuous lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the number of times that continuation is determined satisfies a specific number (in this embodiment, n times “5” (n = 1, 2, 3,...)), An additional G number lottery is added. Another additional extra G number lottery is performed. As a result, if the continuation continues, the value of the added game number may increase, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Between flags]
This is a sub gaming state that is shifted to when a pseudo bonus (first ART) is won, a BB precursor flag described later is on, and the first ART precursor game is 0.

<Configuration of data table stored on ROM cartridge substrate>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROHM cartridge substrate 76 will be described.

[CZ (chance zone) lottery table]
First, a CZ (chance zone) lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is the general state. This CZ lottery table shows the correspondence between the winning content of CZ (chance zone) and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the CZ lottery using the CZ lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially by lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 50, when CZ lottery is performed with reference to the CZ lottery table, there is a high probability that the lottery result will be “no winning”. For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “No winning” is obtained with a probability of 32718/32768, and “CZ2 winning” is obtained with a probability of 50/32768.

[CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table]
Next, the CZ cut-in addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ cut-in addition lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is CZ. This CZ cut-in addition lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence / absence of the specified number of additions and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the cut-in addition lottery using the CZ medium cut-in addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as the lottery result. Subtract one by one with the lottery value specified according to Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “1 addition to the specified number of times” is always determined, and the winning number is “34” (abbreviation “F_watermelon”). In this case, “add 1 to the specified number” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. When “add 1 to the specified number of times” is determined, “1” is added to the value of the cut-in number counter in CZ. As a result, the number of times of “navigating to the black BAR” in CZ is increased by one.

[CZ cut-in lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table will be described. The CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table is referred to when the sub game state is CZ. This CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table shows lottery values set in accordance with the presence or absence of loss cut-in when the result of the internal lottery is “losing”.

  In the cut-in generation lottery using the CZ cut-in generation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as the lottery result. Subtract one by one with the lottery value specified according to Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is “lost”, “loss cut-in occurrence” is determined with a probability of 10,000 / 32768. The loss cut-in is “navigating to the black BAR” performed when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not won. In “Navigating for black BAR”, it is recommended to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”), and the stop order (right middle left) in that case To do. When the lose cut-in is executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not stopped and displayed.
In addition, even when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is won, “navigation for black BAR” is performed.

[Bonus lottery table]
Next, the bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is in the general state and in the second ART. This bonus lottery table indicates the correspondence between the presence / absence of a bonus and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the bonus lottery using the bonus lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially by lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “bonus winning” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is “34” (abbreviation “F_watermelon”). If it is, “bonus winning” is determined with a probability of 326/32768. When “bonus winning” is determined, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is started through the first ART precursor game and the game under preparation corresponding to various bonuses.

  The bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 53 is a low probability bonus lottery table in which the probability of determining “bonus winning” is a predetermined probability. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a high-probability bonus lottery table having a higher probability of determining “bonus winning” than the low-probability bonus lottery table is provided. In the present embodiment, a bonus lottery table to be used is determined according to the types of a plurality of modes to be described later.

[G lottery table on G number in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the G number addition lottery table in BB will be described. The lottery table with the G number added in BB is referred to when the BB in the first ART is in progress. This G number extra lottery table in BB shows the correspondence between the contents of the extra and lottery values set according to the winning number.

  In the G number addition lottery using the G number addition lottery table in the BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) The lottery value is sequentially subtracted according to the lottery result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “20G” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is “34” (abbreviation “F_watermelon”). In some cases, “10G” is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. When the number of G (game) such as “10G” and “20G” is determined, the determined number of G is added to the BB medium / high probability counter.

[ART lottery table in BB]
Next, the BB ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The BB ART lottery table shown in FIG. 55 is referred to when the non-ART BB is in a high probability state described later. This BB ART lottery table shows the second in the case where the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”). The lottery value set in accordance with the presence / absence of ART winning is shown.

  In the ART lottery using the BB ART lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, 0-32767, random number denominator = 32768) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery values. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the case of a non-ART BB and a high probability state, and the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, “ART winning” is always determined. This “ART winning” means that the winning of the second ART is determined. When “ART winning” is determined, the second ART is started through the second ART precursor game and the ART preparing game.

[BR lottery table in BB]
Next, the BR lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. The BR lottery table during BB is referred to when the BB during ART is in a high probability state. The BR lottery table in BB shows the BR winning when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”). The lottery value set according to the presence or absence of.

  In the BR lottery using the BR lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery values. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the BB in ART is in a high probability state and the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, “Battle Rush (BR) 1” has a probability of 16384/32768. “Winner” is determined, and “Battle Rush (BR) 2 Winner” is determined with a probability of 3276/32768. “BR2” has a higher probability of winning “BR continuation” in continuous lottery than “BR1”. The determined “BR1” or “BR2” is started after the end of the first ART (pseudo bonus).

[BR continuous lottery table]
Next, the BR continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. The BR1 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to when BR1 is in progress. The BR2 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to when BR2 is in progress. The BR1 continuous lottery table and the BR2 continuous lottery table indicate lottery values set in accordance with the presence or absence of BR continuation.

  In the BR lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as a lottery result. Subtract one by one with the lottery value specified according to Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table, “BR continuation” is determined with a probability of 26214/32768. As shown in FIG. 58, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, “BR continuation” is determined with a probability of 29490/32768.

[Additional lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the BR additional addition lottery table will be described. The additional extra lottery table during BR is referred to when BR is in progress. This additional extra lottery table during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the extra and lottery values set according to the number of BRs to be continued.

  In the additional extra lottery using the BR extra extra lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is determined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the BR continuation number is “5” (BR5th station), “additional addition A” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and “additional addition B” is determined with a probability of 9434/32768. . Further, “additional addition C1” is determined with a probability of 4000/32768, “additional addition C2” is determined with a probability of 2500/32768, and “additional addition C3” is determined with a probability of 450/32768.

[Additional extra during BR and promotion lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, an additional addition during BR and a promotion lottery table will be described. The additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR is referred to when BR is in progress. This additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the additional addition and promotion lottery using the BR additional addition and promotion lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment), The lottery value is sequentially subtracted according to the lottery result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “additional additional C1” is determined with a probability of 25768/32768, and “additional additional C2” is determined with a probability of 6000/32768. Is done. Further, “additional addition C3” is determined with a probability of 1000/32768. In addition, when it is already determined to perform additional extra lottery, whether or not to be promoted to a higher additional extra lottery is performed using the additional extra and promoted lottery table during BR.

  It should be noted that the upper additional lottery has a higher expectation (probability) that the value of the number of added games to be determined is larger than the additional additional lottery that is lower than that. In this embodiment, “additional addition B” is higher than “additional addition A”, and “additional addition C1”, “additional addition C2”, and “additional addition C3” are higher than “additional addition B”. Further, “additional addition C2” is higher than “additional addition C2”, and “additional addition C3” is higher than “additional addition C2”.

[Additional addition A addition G number lottery table]
Next, the additional addition A addition G number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The additional addition A addition G number lottery table is referred to when the addition G number lottery related to “addition addition A” is performed in BR. This additional addition A addition G number lottery table shows the addition G number and the lottery value set according to the addition G number.

  In the extra G number lottery using the additional extra A extra G number lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified according to the result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the extra G number lottery using the additional extra A extra G number lottery table, “10” is determined as the “additional game number” with the probability of 12568/32768, and “additional game number” with the probability of 13000/32768. “20” is determined. Further, “100” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 500/32768, and “200” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 100/32768. Then, the determined value of “number of added games” is added to the ART game number counter.

[Additional extra B extra G number lottery table]
Next, the additional addition B addition G number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The additional addition B addition G number lottery table is referred to when the addition G number lottery related to “addition addition B” is performed in BR. This additional extra B extra G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the extra G number and the lottery value set according to the stop operation.

  The additional G number lottery using the additional extra B extra G number lottery table is performed each time a stop operation is detected. The column “1 on” illustrated in FIG. 62 is referred to when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed. The column “2on_previous + 10” is referred to when the second stop operation (second stop operation) is performed after “10” is determined as the number of additional games in the first stop operation. The The column “3on_previous + 10” is referred to when the third stop operation (the third stop operation) is performed after “10” is determined as the number of additional games in the second stop operation. The

  In the extra G number lottery using the additional extra B extra G number lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified according to the result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the case of “1 on”, “20” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 13000/32768. When the second stop operation is performed after “20” is determined as the “number of added games” in the first stop operation, the column “2on_previous + 20” is referred to in the extra G number lottery.

  For example, in the case of “2on_before + 20”, “30” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 6000/32768. When the third stop operation is performed after “30” is determined as the “number of added games” in the second stop operation, the column “3on_previous + 30” is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

  For example, in the case of “3on_previous + 30”, “50” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 500/32768. In this case, by performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, a total of “100” is acquired as the “number of added games”, and “100” is displayed in the ART game number counter. Is added.

  Referring to the column “2on_previous + 20” in FIG. 62, “0” and “10” are not determined as the number of additional games. Also, referring to the column “2on_previous + 30” in FIG. 62, “0”, “10”, and “20” are not determined as the number of additional games. Then, referring to the column “3on_previous + 50”, “0”, “10”, “20”, and “30” are not determined as the number of additional games.

  As described above, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table, the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation is greater than or equal to the number of additional games determined by the first stop operation. The number of additional games determined by the stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation.

[Additional addition C addition G number lottery table]
Next, the additional addition C addition G number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The additional extra C extra G number lottery table is referred to when the extra G number lottery related to “addition extra C1”, “addition extra C2” or “addition extra C3” is performed in BR. This additional extra C extra G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the extra G number and the lottery values set according to the types of additional extra C (C1 to C3).

  The extra G number lottery using the additional extra C extra G number lottery table is performed every time the press of the MAX bet button 14 is detected, and is ended when “0” is determined as the “additional game number” (“ No continuation ”).

  In the extra G number lottery using the additional extra C extra G number lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified according to the result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the case of “additional extra C1”, “0” is determined as the “number of extra games” with a probability of 8918/32768. In the case of “additional extra C2”, “0” is determined as the “number of extra games” with a probability of 4918/32768. In the case of “additional addition C3”, “0” is determined as the “number of additional games” with a probability of 2918/32768.

  Therefore, the “additional extra C2” has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the “additional additional C1”, and the “additional additional C3” has a higher probability of continuing the additional G number lottery than the “additional additional C2”. high.

  In addition, when an additional G number lottery using the additional G number lottery table is started, if the start lever 16 is operated and the next game is started, the additional extra C amount G is automatically added. An extra G number lottery is performed using a number lottery table. Then, when “0” is determined as the “number of added games” in the automatically added G number lottery performed automatically, the automatic additional G number lottery ends. In addition, the automatic addition G number lottery may be provided with an upper limit value (for example, “1000”) of the value of the “number of addition games” to be determined.

  Further, in the additional G number lottery using the additional extra C extra G number lottery table, the start lever 16 is operated in a state where “other than“ 0 ”is determined as“ additional game number ”and“ continue ”is determined. There is a case. In this case, the “addition number of games” determined so far is validated, and the additional G number lottery using the additional addition C addition G number lottery table is automatically performed. Then, the “addition game number” determined in the automatically added G number lottery is added to the “addition game number” that has been determined before the automatic addition G number lottery is performed. “Additional number of games” obtained by the extra G number lottery using the C extra G number lottery table.

[Causal value lottery table]
Next, the causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The causal value lottery table is referred to when performing causal value lottery satisfying various conditions. This causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to various conditions.

  In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a value of “causal value” is obtained in various scenes where the interest of the game is reduced (the player feels uncomfortable). Then, a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the accumulated “causal value”. Therefore, even if a scene in which the interest of the game is reduced occurs, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained thereafter. Thereby, it can prevent that a player stops a game with the fall of the interest of a game.

  In the causal value lottery using the causal value lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery values. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 64 shows a causal value lottery table (part 1). This causal value lottery table (part 1) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of G (game) between rare roles.

The rare role according to the present embodiment includes “strong bell” (winning number “27”), “watermelon” (winning number “34”), “weak cherry” (winning number “35”), “strong cherry” (winning number) Number "36") and "chance eyes" (winning numbers "38" to "40"). The “G number between rare combinations” is the number of Gs from when any rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination until when any rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination.

For example, when “the number of G between rare roles” reaches “50 G (game)”, “1” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.
If “the number of G between rare roles” exceeds “200 G”, a causal value lottery that refers to the column “200 G” is performed every time the “G number between rare roles” increases by 100 G.

  FIG. 65 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 2). This causal value lottery table (No. 2) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of G (game) between bonuses. Between bonuses is the number of G from the end of the first ART (pseudo bonus) to the start of the next first ART (pseudo bonus).

  For example, when “G number between bonuses” reaches “200 G (game)”, “1” is determined as “causal value” with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 66 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 3). This causal value lottery table (No. 3) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of G (games) between BBs. Between BB is the number of G from the end of the BB in the first ART (pseudo bonus) to the start of the BB in the next first ART (pseudo bonus).

  For example, when “the number of G between BBs” reaches “400 G (game)”, “3” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 67 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 4). This causal value lottery table (part 4) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of G (games) between ARTs. Between ARTs is the number of G from the end of the second ART to the start of the next second ART.

  For example, when “the number of G between ARTs” reaches “500 G (game)”, “3” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 68 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 5). This causal value lottery table (No. 5) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of consecutive RBs. The number of consecutive RBs is the number of times that RBs are successively lottered as the type of pseudo bonus when the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined. The number of consecutive RBs is counted by an RB continuous counter.

  For example, when “the number of consecutive RBs” is “4”, “5” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 1000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. The value of the RB continuous counter is cleared when BB or SBB is determined in the first ART (pseudo bonus).

FIG. 69 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 6). This causal value lottery table (part 6)
Indicates the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive CZ (chance zone) failures. The number of consecutive CZ failures is the number of times that “CZ1” and “CZ2” are finished without the first ART (pseudo bonus) being determined. In the present embodiment, a column for the first CZ failure is also provided. Further, the number of consecutive CZ failures is counted by a CZ failure continuous counter.

For example, when “the number of consecutive CZ failures” is “failure_2 continuous”, 3000/327
“1” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 68. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the CZ failure continuous counter is cleared when the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined in “CZ1” and “CZ2”. Note that the value of the CZ failure continuous counter may be cleared when the first ART (pseudo bonus) is started.

  FIG. 70 shows a causal value lottery table (part 7). This causal value lottery table (No. 7) shows the correspondence between the causal values and the lottery values set according to the continuation G number of the CZ that has been completed without determining the bonus.

  For example, when “the number of continuation G of CZ that has been completed without determining the bonus” is “4G”, “10” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  “CZ1” and “CZ2” are periods in which the player's interest is enhanced because they can expect the determination of the first ART (pseudo bonus) rather than the general game. However, “CZ1” and “CZ2” according to the present embodiment may be terminated in a short period (small number of games) because the termination condition is the number of executions of “aiming for black BAR navigation”. Therefore, when “CZ1” and “CZ2” end in a short period of time, the probability of assigning “causal value” or “causal value” is increased. As a result, even if there is a scene where the interest of the game in “CZ1” and “CZ2” is reduced, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained thereafter, and the player can be prevented from stopping the game. it can.

  FIG. 71 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 8). The causal value lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the setting of the pachislot 1 is changed. This causal value lottery table (No. 8) shows causal values and lottery values set according to the causal values.

  For example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is changed, “10” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768, and “40” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 8000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 72 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 9). This causal value lottery table (No. 9) shows a correspondence relationship between causal values and lottery values set according to various pseudo bonuses and the G number digested during the preparation of the ART (second ART). Further, the number of G digested during preparation is counted by a preparation digested G number counter.

  For example, when “the number of games digested during preparation” reaches “20G”, “1” is determined as “causal value” with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. In addition, the value of the G digest counter in preparation is cleared on condition that various pseudo bonuses or the start of the second ART is started.

[Provisional causal value lottery table]
Next, the provisional causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The provisional causal value lottery table is referred to when the development effect fails. This provisional causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between provisional causal values and lottery values set according to the type of development effect.

  The “development effect” according to the present embodiment is executed continuously over a plurality of games and whether or not the first ART (pseudo bonus) is won or whether or not the CZ (chance zone) is won. It is an effect that informs. The “when the development effect has failed” is a case where it is notified that the first ART (pseudo bonus) has not been won or the CZ (chance zone) has not been won in the development effect.

  The “notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined” may be various winning notifications such as the fact that the second ART (ART) has won. Further, in the case of a gaming machine having a bonus (so-called “BB” or “MB” which becomes a carryover, etc.), the bonus is won as “notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player is determined”. It is possible to mention that this has been done.

  In addition, the time when the “gaming state advantageous to the player” is started may be from the next game after the notification is made, and a special condition is satisfied in the game after the notification is made. It may be the case. As special conditions, for example, a special internal winning combination (an internal winning combination related to a bonus) is determined, or a special symbol combination (a combination of symbols related to the start of a bonus) is stopped and displayed. Can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, the “notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined” according to the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the definite notification of the various types of winnings as described above, but is described above. Such notifications may indicate various types of winnings. In addition, the “notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has not been determined” according to the gaming machine of the present invention is to be surely notified that various winnings as described above have not been determined. It is not limited to, It may be information that suggests that various winnings have not been determined.

  In the temporary causal value lottery using the temporary causal value lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is determined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when “Development effect 1” fails, “3” is determined as the “provisional causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768. On the other hand, when “Development effect 4” fails, “3” is determined as the “provisional causal value” with a probability of 3000/32768. A “causal value” is determined based on the “provisional causal value” and an “internal point” described later.

  “Development effect 4” has a higher probability of being notified that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player than “development effect 1” has been determined. Therefore, in the “Development effect 4”, when it is notified that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has not been determined, the player's dissatisfaction increases, but a privilege advantageous later is granted. The player can have a sense of expectation.

[Internal point lottery table]
Next, an internal point lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal point lottery table is referred to when an internal point lottery is performed. And an internal point lottery is performed at every game. This internal point lottery table shows the correspondence between internal points and lottery values set according to the winning number.

  In the internal point lottery using the internal point lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery values. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “1” is determined as “internal point” with a probability of 512/32768, and “internal point” with a probability of 265/32768. “3” is determined. The determined “internal point” is added to the internal point counter.

  The value of the internal point counter is the highest “causal value” determined when the development effect fails. For example, it is assumed that “5” is determined as the “temporary causal value” by the temporary causal value lottery performed when the development effect fails, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is “10”. In this case, since “10” is guaranteed as the maximum value of the “causal value”, “5” of the “provisional causal value” is determined as the “causal value”.

On the other hand, it is assumed that “5” is determined as the “temporary causal value” by the temporary causal value lottery, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is “3”. In this case, since “3” is guaranteed as the maximum value of “causal value”, “5” of “provisional causal value” is not determined as “causal value” as it is, but the internal points acquired so far “3”, which is the same value as, is determined as the “causal value”.
If the development effect fails and the “causal value” is determined, the value determined as the “causal value” is subtracted from the value of the internal point counter.

[Causal stock consumption lottery table]
Next, the causal value stock consumption lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The causal value stock consumption lottery table is referred to when a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the value of the causal value stock. The causal value stock consumption lottery table indicates whether or not the causal value stock is consumed, and lottery values set according to whether or not the causal value stock is consumed.

  The “causal value stock” is given when the “causal value” becomes “100” or more. Specifically, when the value of the causal value counter becomes “100” or more, “1” is added to the causal value stock counter, and “100” is subtracted from the value of the causal value counter.

  In the causal value stock consumption lottery using the causal value stock consumption lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as the lottery result. Subtract one by one with the lottery value specified according to Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the value of the causal value stock, “no consumption” of the “causal value stock” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. In this case, a privilege advantageous to the player is granted without reducing the value of the causal value stock counter.

  As a privilege advantageous to the player to be granted based on the value of the causal value stock, changing the type of the pseudo bonus to a higher pseudo bonus can be mentioned. For example, when “BB” is determined as the pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is changed to “SBB”. Further, when the transition to CZ1 is determined, the transition to CZ2 may be changed.

  Benefits that are advantageous to the player are not granted immediately when the “Causal Value Stock” is 1 or more, but when a specific condition (determination of pseudo bonus) is met, or at a specific time ( It is preferable to give it when it becomes (when lottery is lottery). In this case, after the “causal value stock” becomes 1 or more, the game can be prompted to play until a specific condition is met or a specific time is reached.

[Operating condition table]
Next, the operation condition table will be described with reference to FIG. The operating condition table is referred to during each preparation. This operation condition table shows the types being prepared and the operation (end) conditions set according to the types being prepared.

  For example, when the winning number “18” (abbreviation “F_W7_KP_RT4”) is won during the SBB preparation, the SBB preparation is ended, and the SBB in the first ART (pseudo bonus) is started. In addition, when the winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) are won during the BB preparation, the BB preparation is finished and the first ART is finished (first ART). BB in (bonus) is started.

  If the winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) are won during the RB preparation, the RB preparation is finished and the first bonus (pseudo) RB is started. In addition, during the ART preparation, the winning numbers “18” to “24” (abbreviated names “F_W7_KP_RT4”, “F_KP_R4_R2_1”, “F_KP_R4_R2_2”, “F_KP_R2_R4_1”, “F_KP_R2_R4_1”, “F_R”, “F_K”) The preparation is finished and the second ART is started.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning combination (winning number) that is an ending condition under preparation is won, information (stop order navigation) for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (winning number) is notified. However, even when the stop operation is performed without following the stop order navigation and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination serving as the end condition during preparation is not stopped and displayed, the preparation is completed.

  Therefore, when a stop operation that does not follow the stop order navigation is performed, the RT gaming state does not shift to the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state, and the first ART (pseudo bonus) or the second ART is set as the sub gaming state. Is started. As a result, the number of games for managing the first ART (pseudo bonus) and the second ART in the sub gaming state is subtracted without shifting to the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

<Configuration of storage area provided in sub-RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of a sub storage area provided in the sub RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, although explanation is omitted (not shown), various data such as a storage area for registering effect contents and effect numbers and an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) are stored. Storage area and the like.

  The sub storage areas are “CZ1 flag”, “CZ2 flag”, “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, “RB flag”, “ART flag”, “BR1 flag”, “RB2 flag”, and “flag flag”. have.

  The “CZ1 flag” is a flag indicating that CZ1 is in progress. If it is in CZ1, “1” is stored in the “CZ1 flag”. The “CZ2 flag” is a flag indicating that CZ2 is in progress. If it is in CZ2, “1” is stored in the “CZ2 flag”.

The “SBB flag” is a flag indicating that the SBB is in the first ART (pseudo bonus), and “1” is stored in the “SBB flag” when the SBB is in progress. The “BB flag” is a flag indicating that the BB is in the first ART. When the BB is in progress, “1” is stored in the “BB flag”. The “RB flag” is a flag indicating that the RB is in the first ART. When the RB is in the RB, “1” is stored in the “RB flag”.
That is, when the first ART is being performed, “1” is stored in any of the “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, and “RB flag”.

  The “ART flag” is a flag indicating that the second ART is being performed. When the second ART is being performed, “1” is stored in the “ART flag”.

  The “BR1 flag” is a flag indicating that BR1 is in progress, and when it is in BR1, “1” is stored in the “BR1 flag”. The “RB2 flag” is a flag indicating that BR2 is in progress. When the flag is in BR2, “1” is stored in the “BR2 flag”. As described above, during BR1 and BR2, 10 games are set as one set, and one set is repeated (loops) as long as “BR continuation” continues to be won by continuous lottery.

  The “flag flag” is a flag indicating that the flag is being flagged. When the flag is being flagged, “1” is stored in the “flag flag”.

  The sub storage area includes an “additional addition A flag”, “additional addition B flag”, “additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, and “additional addition C3 flag”.

  The “additional addition A flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition A is in progress. When the addition addition A is in progress, “1” is stored in the “additional addition A flag”. The “additional additional B flag” is a flag indicating that the additional addition B is in progress. When the additional addition B is in progress, “1” is stored in the “additional additional B flag”.

  The “additional addition C1 flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition C1 is in progress, and “1” is stored in the “additional addition C1 flag” when the addition addition C1 is in progress. The “additional addition C2 flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition C2 is in progress, and “1” is stored in the “additional addition C2 flag” when the addition addition C2 is in progress. The “additional addition C3 flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition C3 is in progress. When the addition addition C3 is in progress, “1” is stored in the “additional addition C3 flag”. Note that “1” is stored in the “additional additional C3 flag” even after the additional addition C3 is determined and started.

  “CZ1 flag”, “CZ2 flag 2”, “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, “RB flag”, “ART flag”, “BR1 flag”, “BR2 flag”, “additional additional A flag”, “addition” The “additional B flag”, “additional additional C1 flag”, “additional additional C2 flag”, and “additional additional C3 flag” actually start after execution of the corresponding production (transition to the corresponding state) is determined. “1” is stored in the period up to.

  Further, the sub storage area has a “CZ1 precursor flag”, “CZ2 precursor flag”, “BB precursor flag”, “RB precursor flag”, “ART precursor flag”, and “BR precursor flag”.

  The “CZ1 precursor flag” is a flag indicating that a CZ1 precursor is present. When the CZ1 precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “CZ1 precursor flag”. The “CZ2 precursor flag” is a flag indicating that a CZ2 precursor is present. When the CZ2 precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “CZ2 precursor flag”.

  The “BB precursor flag” is a flag indicating that a BB (SBB) precursor is present. When the BB (SBB) precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “BB precursor flag”. The “RB precursor flag” is a flag indicating that an RB precursor is present. If the RB precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “RB precursor flag”.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, it is determined whether to select “SBB”, “BB”, or “RB”. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, it is determined only whether or not “RB” is set, and when it is determined not to be set to “RB”, at the end of the BB precursor, It may be determined whether to select “SB” or “BB”.

  The “ART precursor flag” is a flag indicating that an ART (second ART) precursor is present. When the ART precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “ART precursor flag”. Further, the “BR precursor flag” is a flag indicating that a BR precursor is present. When the BR precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “BR precursor flag”.

  The sub-storage area has an “SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag”, “RB preparing flag”, and “ART preparing flag”.

  The “SBB preparing flag” is a flag indicating that the SBB is being prepared. When the SBB is being prepared, “1” is stored in the “SBB preparing flag”. The “BB preparing flag” is a flag indicating that the BB is being prepared. When the BB is being prepared, “1” is stored in the “SBB preparing flag”.

  The “RB preparation flag” is a flag indicating that the RB is being prepared. When the RB is being prepared, “1” is stored in the “RB preparation flag”. The “ART ready flag” is a flag indicating that the ART is being prepared. When the ART is being prepared, “1” is stored in the “ART ready flag”.

In the present embodiment, “under preparation” conceptually indicates a section in which a predetermined state is determined to start but cannot be started because the start condition is not satisfied. During preparation, it is similar to a warning sign, but unlike a warning sign, it actively encourages the start condition to be met.
For example, when the generation of ART is determined, in order to start the ART, it is necessary to simultaneously generate AT and RT. The AT can be started immediately by the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), but the RT is managed by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8). However, since communication from the sub-control circuit 101 to the main control circuit 91 is impossible, in general, “AT for satisfying the RT start condition by the main control circuit 91” is performed indirectly. Encourage the start of RT. That is, in general, a difference between the AT start timing by the sub control circuit 101 and the RT start timing by the main control circuit 91 is a section referred to as being prepared.

Then, if the determination of the ART end condition is started in accordance with the start of the AT, the ART period is included in the ART period. Therefore, in some cases, the ART period ends without generating an ART. There is a fear. Such a game machine makes the player uncomfortable and makes design development difficult because the ART period assumed at the time of development (when the end condition is set) differs from the actual ART period. It becomes a factor.
Therefore, although the AT is performed until the condition of the RT (main control circuit 91 side) is satisfied, the period for not including the ART period is provided by not determining the ART end condition. Since this section is a section in which ART is being prepared, this section is referred to as being prepared.

  In addition, the sub storage area includes “CZ game number counter”, “pseudo bonus game number counter”, “ART game number counter”, “BR game number counter”, “additional additional game number counter”, and “additional game number counter”. "have.

  The “CZ game number counter” is incremented by “1” every time a game is played in CZ1 or CZ2, and the value of the “CZ game number counter” is cleared when CZ1 or CZ2 ends. In the “pseudo-bonus game number counter”, the number of games (“30” or “60” or “100”) set according to the types of various pseudo-bonuses is set before the pseudo-bonus is started. .

  Then, “1” is subtracted every time a game is played in the first ART (pseudo bonus). Note that when the “BB medium / high probability counter” described later has a value, the subtraction of the “pseudo bonus medium game number counter” is stopped.

  “50” is set in the “ART game number counter” before the second ART is started. The “ART game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game is played in the second ART. In the “BR game number counter”, “10” is set before BR1 or BR2 is started. The “BR game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game is played in BR1 or BR2.

  “2” is set in the “additional added game number counter” before the game related to the additional addition effect is started. The “additional additional game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game related to the additional addition effect is performed.

  The “additional game number counter” is provided for temporary storage until the total number of additional games is determined when additional addition is performed. Therefore, each time the additional game number is determined in the additional addition, the determined additional game number is added to the “additional game number counter”.

  In addition, the sub storage area includes “CI (cut-in) number counter in CZ”, “BB medium / high probability counter”, “predictor game number counter”, “preparing digest G number counter”, “internal point counter”, “ It has a “causal value counter” and a “causal value stock counter”.

  In the “CI counter in CZ”, “4” is set before CZ1 is started, and “10” is set before CZ2 is started. Then, the “CI counter in CZ” is decremented by “1” every time “navigating to the black BAR” (cut-in effect) occurs.

  In the “BB medium / high probability counter”, when the additional G number related to the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined by the extra number of G numbers in the BB, the determined additional G number is added. When the “BB medium / high probability counter” has a value, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is in a high probability state. In the high probability state in the first ART, the probability that the winning of the second ART is determined is higher than that in the normal first ART.

  In the “predictor game number counter”, the number of precursor games in each precursor is set before each precursor is started. Then, the “predictor game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game for each precursor is performed. The “preparing digested G number counter” is incremented by “1” each time a game is played during each preparation, and the value of the “preparing digested G number counter” is cleared when each preparation is completed.

  The “internal point counter” adds the value of the determined internal point when the internal point is determined by the internal point lottery. When the “causal value” is determined based on the total of the internal points and the “provisional causal value”, the value determined as the “causal value” is subtracted from the value of the “internal point counter”.

  When the “causal value” is determined by the causal value lottery, the “causal value counter” is added with the determined “causal value”. When the value of the “causal value counter” exceeds “100”, “100” is subtracted from the value of the “causal value counter”, and “1” is added to the “causal value stock counter”.

  Further, the sub storage area includes a “BR continuation flag”, a “BR one-time continuation storage area”, and “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”.

  The “BR continuation flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started. When it is determined that the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, the “BR continuation flag” is set to “BR continuation flag”. “1” is stored.

  The “BR next-time continuous storage area” is a storage area indicating whether BR1 or BR2 continues to the next set. When it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the next set, “1” is stored in the “BR subsequent storage area”.

  In the present embodiment, special BR continuous lottery is performed separately from the BR continuous lottery. When special BR continuation is won in the special BR continuation lottery, it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another. In addition, when it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, a dedicated effect for informing whether or not the special BR is “continuation” is performed.

  “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32” are flags indicating whether execution of BR1 or BR2 is determined. When execution of BR1 is determined, “1” is stored in any one of “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”. If execution of BR2 is determined, “2” is stored in any one of “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”.

  Further, the sub storage area has a “navigation return waiting flag” and a “pseudo bonus penalty flag”.

  The “navigation return waiting state flag” is a flag that is set to ON when a so-called pull back is performed in an ART pull back lottery process (see FIG. 107) described later (S614 in FIG. 107). When the “navigation return waiting flag” is on, the ART game number counter is not subtracted in the ART processing (see FIG. 105) described later. In addition, the “navigation return waiting state flag” is used when the first stop operation (the first stop operation) is performed on a part other than the left reel 3L in the game after the pullback is performed, When the predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order is determined by the main CPU 93 during 2ART, it is set to OFF (S808 in the display command reception process described later with reference to FIG. 116). The predetermined winning numbers for which the stop order is notified during the second ART are, for example, the aforementioned winning numbers “12” and “25”.

  The “pseudo bonus penalty flag” is a flag that is set to ON in a penalty determination process (see FIG. 117) described later when a stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and a pseudo bonus is won. It is. The “pseudo bonus penalty flag” is referred to in a ramp control task (see FIG. 121) described later.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of main operation processing of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to a main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when power is turned on to the pachi-slot 1, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the time of power-on (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each game, such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, input checks of the medal sensor 46S and the start switch 64 are performed. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts random values (0 to 65535), and stores the extracted random values in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 (S4). Next, the main CPU 93 extracts an effect random number value used in the reel effect and lock control in the “continuous lock state”, and uses the extracted effect random number value in the effect random value storage area (not stored) provided in the main RAM 95. (S5). In the present embodiment, an effect random number value 1, an effect random number value 2, and an effect random number value 3 are provided as effect random number values. These production random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted from the range of 0 to 65535, respectively.

  When the extracted various random number values are stored in a predetermined random value storage area, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). Details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S8). Details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 101. The start command includes a parameter for specifying an internal winning combination and the like, and information on whether or not the occurrence of a game lock has been determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game start lock process (S10). In this process, the reel effect and lock at the start of the game corresponding to the type of reel effect and lock performed in the “continuous lock state” determined in the process of S8 are mainly performed. Details of the game start lock process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a wait process (S11). In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel rotation start processing (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, the driving of the three stepping motors is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 99), which will be described later, executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and the left reel 3L Then, the rotation of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a drawing priority order storing process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 45) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41). In this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are stopped, and a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15), Is matched. Then, the main CPU 93 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the active line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal payout processing (S16). In this process, the hopper 43 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S15, and medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15), the number of inserted medals is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum payout. The number of sheets (payout upper limit) is 14 sheets.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 manages the RT gaming state. Details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs payout end command transmission processing (S18). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game with reference to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to replay. Details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S31). The presence / absence of the automatic insertion request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic insertion counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to re-playing has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S31 that there is an automatic loading request (when S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs automatic loading processing (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S31 that there is no automatic insertion request (when S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and the medal inserted from the medal slot 13 is accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper 43.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, in the BB3 (RB3) game state, the maximum value of the inserted number is set to “1”, and in the other game states (BB1, BB2 game state and general game state), the maximum value of the inserted number is set to “3”. To "".

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When the main CPU 93 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is not permitted (when S35 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (S35 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when a medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 101 (S37). The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted coins.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S38 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S38 that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S38 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S39). When the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch is not on (when S39 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch is on (when S39 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout port 18. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. In the present embodiment, internal lottery processing using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means for executing internal lottery processing (internal winning combination determining means).

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S41). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and determines the type and number of lottery of the internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 18). decide. The number of lotteries indicates the number of times of lottery value subtraction and determination of whether or not a digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery value change processing (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a random number value stored in the random value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

  In S45, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when S45 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by one.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S47). In S47, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the small role / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S45 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when S45 is YES), the main CPU 93 According to the winning number, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are acquired (S49).

  After the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 25 to 28) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S51).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S55 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” in S52 (when S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the bonus internal winning combination determination table ( Referring to FIG. 24), an internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S54).

  After the process of S54, or when S52 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S55).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the CB gaming state (S56). In S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the CB gaming state (when S56 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S56 that the main CPU 93 is in the CB gaming state (when S56 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area ( S57). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Lottery value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) to determine whether or not the RT gaming state flag is on (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is set in any of the bits 0 to 4 in the gaming state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 42). In S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state flag is not on (in the case where S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and the process is an internal lottery process (see FIG. 80). ) To S43.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the RT gaming state flag is on (when S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines that the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the RT gaming state that is on. Referring to FIG. 5, the lottery value of the winning number (“1” to “24”) related to replaying in the internal gaming state internal lottery table (see FIG. 19) is changed (S62). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and moves the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the RT4 gaming state (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the RT4 gaming state (when S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S71 that the main CPU 93 is in the RT4 gaming state (in the case where S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39) and sets the effect random number value to 1. Based on this, game lock lottery is performed (S72).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game lock is won in the game lock lottery of S72 (S73). When the main CPU 93 determines in S73 that the game lock is not won (when S73 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and the process proceeds to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S73 that the main CPU 93 has won the game lock (when S73 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets a game lock flag and a lock timer. As a result, a game lock is generated. Then, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation stop number selection table (see FIG. 29), and acquires the rotation stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. (S101).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30), and acquires various information corresponding to the rotation stop number based on the acquired rotation stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 93, corresponding to the acquired spinning cylinder stop number, pull-in priority table selection table number, pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, forward push Time table change initial data and irregular pressing time table selection data are acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S103).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores “3” in the stop button non-operating counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S104). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock process at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is “0” (S112). In S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is not “0” (when S112 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S112 until the value of the lock timer becomes “0”. stand by.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S112 that the value of the lock timer is “0” (when S112 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the game start lock process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( Move to S11 of FIG.

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the drawing priority order storing process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the stop button non-operating counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S121). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S122). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as a search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the left reel 3L. When the process returns to S122 again, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel. Then, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S122 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (the small combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. Details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the symbol position data and sets “21” as the symbol check count (S124). Then, the main CPU 93 performs symbol code storage processing (S125). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. Details of the symbol code storing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storing area (see FIG. 41) based on the acquired symbol code and the data in the symbol code storing area (see FIG. 45) (S126). At this time, regardless of whether the internal winning combination is won or not, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data prepared in advance that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIG. 12 to FIG. 15) may be obtained by collation. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 93 draws in priority for the combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storage area. With reference to the ranking table (see FIG. 37), pull-in priority data is acquired.

  In addition, when symbols of a combination (“C_B_CH_A” to “C_B_CH_D”, “C_C_CH” shown in FIG. 15) related to a combination (for example, “Cherry”) in which a winning is confirmed in some reels are displayed For the reel that is “ANY”, the pull-in priority data of the combination is not acquired. Further, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won is confirmed in the reel for which winning is confirmed, the drawing priority data is set to “stop prohibited (all bits 0)”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in the pull-in priority data storage area (see FIG. 46) (S128). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area. Next, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S129).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130). In S130, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when S130 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S125 and repeats the processes after S125.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S130 that the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches has been searched (S131).

  In S131, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of times of search (when S131 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of times of search (if S131 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process, and the process is S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a description will be given of the attraction priority table selection process performed at S123 in the attraction priority order storage processing flowchart (see FIG. 85).

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a pull-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not a pull-in priority table number is stored directly in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table number is set (when S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority table selection process and stores the pull-in priority order. The process proceeds to S124 of the process (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table number is not set in S141 (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button. Referring to the area (see FIG. 43), the corresponding drawing priority table number is set (S142). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S124 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 85).

  In S142, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the drawing priority table selection table corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data, and acquires the drawing priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code acquisition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S125 in the flowchart of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S151). In this embodiment, the effective line (winning determination line) is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets check symbol position data for the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S152). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S153). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storing process, and moves the process to S126 of the pull-in priority storing process (see FIG. 85).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means for executing reel stop control processing (stop control means).

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). In S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (when S161 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S161, and a valid stop button pressing operation is executed. Wait until.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S161 that a valid stop button has been pressed (in the case where S161 is YES), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 44). 43) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the stop button non-operating counter by 1 (S163).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S165).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S166). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub-control circuit 101 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch. Note that the ON / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 95 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position determined in S168 as a search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 87 (S170). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) using the acquired symbol code (S171).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S172). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S173). In S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button is not released (when S173 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the processing of S173 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S173 that the pressed stop button has been released (YES in S173), the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S175). When the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the inoperative counter is not “0” (in the case where S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 85 (S176). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inoperative counter is “0” in S175 (when S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 78). (Refer to S15).

[Sliding piece number determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the slip piece number determination process performed in S166 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on a line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 93 sets “10000000” in which bit 7 corresponding to “left reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. Select. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects “00010000” in which “1” is set in bit 4 corresponding to “middle reel A line” of the stop data as the line mask data. To do. For example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects “00000010” in which bit 1 corresponding to “right reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. To do.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). In S182, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the first stop (when S182 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). Details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S182 that the main CPU 93 is the first stop (when S182 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button is a left stop button (S184).

  In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 obtains the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the forward selection table selection data is obtained with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the first press stop table corresponding to the forward press table selection data, and acquires the sliding piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S184 that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 obtains the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table selection. An irregular pressing stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing time table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S188). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs line mask data change processing (S189). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 refers to the set table for stopping irregular pressing, and acquires the number of pieces of sliding piece determination based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a priority pull-in control process (S191). In this process, the drawing priority order data is compared according to each symbol position in the range from the stop start position to the maximum number of sliding symbols “4”, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. Details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and moves the process to S167 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, the second and third stop processes performed in S183 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). In S201, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not during the second stop operation (when S201 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the main CPU 93 is at the time of the second stop operation (when S201 is YES), the main CPU 93 presses the stop buttons in order (first reel is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a forward press (when S202 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is a forward press (when S202 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S203). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs line mask data change processing (S204). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding frame number search process (S205). In this process, referring to the stop table (FIGS. 32, 34, and 35), the number of pieces of slip piece determination data is determined based on the stop start position.

  For example, when the line mask data is “00010000” corresponding to “middle reel A line”, the main CPU 93 refers to the column of “middle reel A line” of bit 4. Then, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not the corresponding data is “1” for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols from the stop start position. Next, the main CPU 93 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is “1” to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the number of sliding pieces determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 93 ends the second and third stop processing, and moves the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 91, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the sliding piece number determination process and in S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The check process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change status is “1” or “2” (S211). In S211, when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is “1” or “2” (when S211 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in this embodiment, when the change status is “1”, the A line status is set, and when the change status is “2”, the B line status is set. Then, after the processing of S212, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89), or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) In S204.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S211 that the change status is not “1” or “2” (when S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the column corresponding to “middle reel line change bit” or “right reel line change bit” in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is stored. It is determined whether or not “1”. When the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not “1”, that is, the line change bit is not on (when S213 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process. The process is shifted to S189 in the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S213 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is “1”, that is, the line change bit is ON (when S213 is YES), the main CPU 93 The line status is set (S214). The B line status is data used for changing the line mask data. After the process of S214, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check process, and the process is S189 of the slip piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). ) In S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 92, the line mask data to be executed in S189 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the sliding piece number determination process and in S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The change process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). Note that the setting of the C line status is performed in the case of forward pressing in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 95) described later.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is set in S221 (when S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button. A determination is made (S222).

  In S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button (when S222 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data twice to the right (S223). ). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is a middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop is a right stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00000010” to “10000000” by the process of S223. As a result, the column of bit 7 corresponding to the “right reel C line data” of the stop table for second and third stops (see FIG. 35) at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding frame number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) In S205.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S222 that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when S222 is NO), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S224). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00010000” to “01000000” by the process of S224. As a result, the column of bit 6 corresponding to the “middle reel C line data” of the stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) In S205.

  In S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is not set (when S221 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the B line status is set (S225). . In S225, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is not set (in the case where S225 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data changing process, and the process is determined as the number of sliding frames (see FIG. 89) or S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is set in S225 (when S225 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data once to the right (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is “00000010”, it is changed to “00000001”. As a result, the column corresponding to “B line data” in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) In S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a search order table (see FIG. 38) according to the gaming state (S231). Next, the main CPU 93 sets initial values for the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 93 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, “5” is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the start address of a stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (S233).

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of sliding frames to the expected stop start address, and acquires pull-in priority data (S235).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S236 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S236 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (in the case where S236 is YES), the main CPU 93 detects the slip acquired in S234. The number of frames is saved (S237).

  Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the number of checks by 1, and increments the search order counter by 1 (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (when S239 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is “0” in S239 (when S239 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the number of sliding symbols that have been retreated (S240). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). When the main CPU 93 determines in S251 that it is after the third stop (when S251 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and the process is S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S251 that it is not after the third stop (when S251 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). When the main CPU 93 determines in S252 that it is after the second stop (when S252 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a control process after the second stop (S253). Details of the second post-stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the process of S253, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S252 that the main CPU 93 is not after the second stop (when S252 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S254). In S254, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a forward press (when S254 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S254 that the main CPU 93 is a forward press (when S254 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 33). And the number of searches is set (S255).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a planned stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the change target position according to the acquired planned stop position (S257).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the planned stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated change target position does not match the scheduled stop position (when S258 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches is “0”. (S259). In S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is not “0” (when S259 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is “0” in S259 (when S259 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the second- Obtained as the third stop table number and set the corresponding stop table (S260).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). After the process of S261, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

  In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated change target position coincides with the scheduled stop position (when S258 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the second pressing operation according to the value of the line change status. The third stop table number and C line check data are acquired (S262).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing (S263). After the process of S263, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

[Control change processing after second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the control change process flowchart (see FIG. 94) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S271). In S271, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a forward press (when S271 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 94). To do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 93 is a forward press (when S271 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the C line check data is on (change status is “3”) or not. Is determined (S272). The C line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 94). In S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is not ON (in the case where S272 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and the control change process (FIG. 94) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is on in S272 (when S272 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop. It is determined whether or not (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not ON (when S273 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 94) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S273 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (in the case where S273 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the stored forward pressing. “1” is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 93 ends the second post-stop control change process and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 94).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and checks RT game state transition conditions that can be established in the transition source (current) RT game state (S281).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game state transition condition is not satisfied (when S282 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S284 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S282 that the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (when S282 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and transitions. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the transfer destination is set to a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs display command transmission processing (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 101. The display command includes parameters that specify a display combination, a payout number, and the like. Then, after the process of S284, the main CPU 93 ends the RT control process and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “MB” (“MB1” or “MB2”) is in operation with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is not operating (when S321 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is in operation in S321 (when S321 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”. Is discriminated (S322).

  In S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (when S322 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs bonus end time processing (S323). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the gaming state flag (MB gaming state flag) corresponding to the active “MB”. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the number of medals paid out exceeds 13 during the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S324). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus end command to the sub-control circuit 101. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the end of the bonus (S325). Then, after the process of S325, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” in S322 (when S322 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets each value of the winning number counter and the possible game number counter. Update (S326). The value of the winning count counter is decremented by “1” when a small role (a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the possible number of games counter is “1” for one game regardless of the stop symbol. Subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (S327). In S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is not “0” (when S327 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. The process proceeds to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S327 that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (when S327 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs processing at the end of the CB. (S328). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game state flag (CB game state flag) corresponding to “CB” and clearing the values of the winning possible number counter and the possible gaming number counter are performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “MB” (“MB1” or “MB2”) is in operation (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is not in operation (S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S334 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is operating in S331 (when S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether “CB” is operating (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that “CB” is in operation (in the case where S332 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that “CB” is not in operation (when S332 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs CB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 16). (S333). After the process of S333, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  When S331 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus game is winning (S334). In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” is displayed as a bonus game winning. In S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is not a winning game (when S334 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S338 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is a win in S334 (when S334 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the winning bonus game based on the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 16). A corresponding bonus activation process is performed (S335). In this embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 16), sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), The value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value (“13”). Further, in this process, the CB operation process described in S333 is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S337). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. After S337, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  When S334 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to replaying (replay) is a winning (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination relating to replay is not winning (when S338 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, in S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to replaying is a win (when S338 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S339). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the process of S339, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, an interrupt process by the control of the main CPU 93 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S342). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch on the stop switch board 65 are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S343). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs communication data transmission processing (S344). In this processing, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 as appropriate.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S345). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. Three stepping motors are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line (winning determination line) of the display window). The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S345, not only the above-described normal acceleration process, constant speed process and stop process, but also a reel effect pattern is set when the reel effect pattern is set during the acceleration process. Reel effect (reel action) and lock control processing are also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S346). In this process, the main CPU 93 controls the 7-segment display 23 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register restoration process (S347). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main board communication task]
First, a main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks reception of a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S501). Next, when receiving a command, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command type is normal (S503). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with one of a plurality of types of codes, and when the game is operating normally, the type of the command is one of the plurality of types of codes. Therefore, in the process of S502, if the received command type code is one of a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal. On the other hand, if the command type code is other than a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including an illegal act) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is not a normal command type.

  In S503, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is not normal (when S503 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S503 that the type of command is normal (when S503 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). . The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, an effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 extracts a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S512 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S515 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S512 that there is a message in the message queue (when S512 is YES), the sub CPU 102 copies the game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as the internal winning combination, the type of reel that has stopped rotating, the display combination, and the game state flag specified by the parameters are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub-RAM 103. The

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs effect content determination processing (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the contents of the effect, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers lamp data (S517). Then, the sub CPU 102 registers the accessory data (S518). Note that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S514. After S518, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S511 and repeats the processes after S511.

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a start command reception time (S521).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S521 that the start command is being received (when S521 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a start command receiving process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the effect random number, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers it. Here, the production number is data for designating the content of the production to be executed this time. Details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the production data at the start according to the registered production number (S523). The effect data is data that designates animation data, sound data, lamp data, and accessory data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and effects such as display of video are executed. Then, after the process of S523, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S521 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a start command (when S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a reel stop command reception (S524).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S524 that the reel stop command is being received (when S524 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a reel stop command receiving process (S525). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery when the additional addition B flag is on.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the production data at the time of stop according to the registered production number and the type of the operation stop button (S526). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S524 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving the reel stop command (NO in S524), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is receiving the display command (S527).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S527 that the display command is being received (when S527 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a display command receiving process (S528). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub game state transition process and a penalty determination process for shifting the sub game state based on the winning mode. Details of the display command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets display effect data in accordance with the registered effect number and display combination (S529). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S527 that the display command is not received (when S527 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the payout end command is received (S530). In S530, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is time to receive a payout end command (when S530 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs payout end command reception processing (S531). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S530 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a payout end command (NO in S530), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is a bonus start command reception (S532).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S532 that the bonus start command is being received (YES in S532), the sub CPU 102 sets bonus start effect data (S533). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S532 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a bonus start command (when S532 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is receiving a bonus end command (S534). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S534 that the bonus end command is being received (S534 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets bonus end effect data (S535). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S534 that the bonus end command is not received (when S534 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a no-operation command is received (S536). In S536, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a no-operation command reception (when S536 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and the process of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101). Move to S515.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S536 that the sub CPU 102 is receiving a no-operation command (when S536 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a no-operation command receiving process (S537). The details of the non-operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. After the process of S537, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the process at the time of start command reception performed in S522 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described. In the present embodiment, the start command reception process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is being performed (S541). During the pseudo bonus (first ART), any of the SBB flag, the BB flag, and the RB flag is on, and the BB precursor flag and the RB precursor flag are off.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S541 that the pseudo bonus is being performed (in the case where S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo bonus process (S542). The details of the pseudo bonus mid-process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S541 that the sub CPU 102 is not in a pseudo bonus (when S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in ART (second ART) (S543). . During ART (second ART), the ART (second ART) flag is on and the ART precursor flag is off.

  In S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART (second ART) is in progress (when S543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART processing (S544). The details of the ART processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S543 that the sub CPU 102 is not in the ART (second ART) (when S543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs normal middle processing (S545). Note that details of the normal middle processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

  After the processes of S542 and S545, the sub CPU 102 performs a process during preparation (S546). Details of the preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a precursor check process (S547). Details of the warning check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect lottery process (S548). Details of the effect lottery processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. After the process of S548, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command, and moves the process to S523 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102).

[Processing during pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the process during the pseudo bonus performed in S542 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the start command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus preparation flag is on (S561). The pseudo bonus preparing flag includes an SBB preparing flag, a BB preparing flag, and an RB preparing flag. Accordingly, in S561, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the SBB preparing flag, the BB preparing flag, and the RB preparing flag is on.

  In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus preparation flag is on (when S561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied. (S562). The start condition corresponding to the SBB preparation flag is that the winning number “18” (abbreviated as “F_W7_KP_RT4”) is won in the internal lottery process. The start conditions corresponding to the BB preparing flag and the RB preparing flag are winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) in the internal lottery process. It is to win.

  In S562, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied (when S562 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo bonus start process (S563).

  In the pseudo bonus start process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the preparation flag corresponding to the started pseudo bonus and sets the value (“100” or “60” or “30”) corresponding to the started pseudo bonus to the pseudo bonus. Set to the bonus game number counter. In addition, the sub CPU 102 clears the preparation digestion G number counter. After the process of S563, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the pseudo bonus, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S562 that the start condition corresponding to each in-preparation flag is not satisfied (when S562 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus processing and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the time process (see FIG. 103).

  In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus preparation flag is not on (when S561 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB flag is on (S564).

  In S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB flag is on (in the case where S564 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the G number in BB based on the G number addition lottery table (see FIG. 54) in BB. An extra lottery process is performed (S565). In the BB medium G number lottery process, when the number of additional games is determined, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined value to the BB medium high probability counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an BB ART lottery process based on the BB ART lottery table, or performs an BB BR lottery process based on the BR (Battle Rush) lottery table (S566).

  Specifically, it is a non-ART BB, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”) is internal winning by internal lottery processing. When it is determined as a winning combination, an ART lottery process during BB is performed. Also, a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”), which is a BB in ART, is determined as an internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. In the case, BR lottery processing is performed.

  In the BB ART lottery process, when “ART winning” is determined, the sub CPU 102 turns on the “ART flag” (stores “1” in the “ART flag”). Further, in the BR lottery process during BB, when “Battle Rush 1 Win” is determined, the sub CPU 102 stores “1” in the “BR stock storage area”. When “Battle Rush 2 Win” is determined, the sub CPU 102 stores “2” in the “BR stock storage area”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery result in S566 is a win (S567). That is, it is determined whether one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, or “Battle rush 2 winning” has been determined.

  In S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a win (when S567 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “reverse-pressed navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” (S568). Note that “reverse pressing” in the present embodiment means that the stop order is “middle right” or “middle right”.

  The above-mentioned special internal winning combination is an internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number (data pointer for small combination / replay) “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”. In the present embodiment, when the winning number (small pointer / replay data pointer) is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, the stop order is “right left middle” or “right middle left”. As a result, the combination of symbols corresponding to “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P” is stopped and displayed.

  When the combination of symbols corresponding to “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P” is stopped and displayed, “white BAR” − “white BAR” − “along a straight line extending over the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It is possible to stop and display the combination of symbols of “white BAR”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined, “reverse pushing navigation (navigating white BAR)” is performed.

  Stop operation is performed in accordance with “reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)”, and the combination of symbols of “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” is stopped and displayed along a straight line. Then, the player can recognize that one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined. At this time, if it is a non-ART BB, "ART winning" is determined, and if it is BB during ART, "battle rush 1 winning" or "battle rush 2 winning" is determined.

  Even if the data pointer (winning number) for the small role / replay is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, “Battle rush 2” If none of the “winning” is determined, “reverse-push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is not performed. In other words, even if the combination of symbols of “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” can be stopped, any one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” Is not determined, “reverse-push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is not performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as an internal winning combination, the ART lottery process during BB or the BR lottery process during BB is performed. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, even when an internal winning combination other than a special internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery process, the ART lottery process during BB or the BR lottery process during BB may be performed.

  For example, if an internal winning combination other than a special internal winning combination is determined and one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, or “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined, When the winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as the internal winning combination, “reverse push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is performed. That is, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is subsequently determined as an internal winning combination, regardless of the result of the ART lottery process during BB or the BR lottery process during BB, Navigation (Aiming at the white BAR) ”.

  In S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a win (when S567 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a reverse reverse lottery based on a reverse reverse lottery table (not shown) (S569). In the present embodiment, when the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, the rasp reverse push lottery is performed. If “gase reverse pressing win” is determined, “reverse pressing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is performed.

  When the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, the ART lottery process during BB and the BR lottery process during BB are not performed. Accordingly, when the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, any of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” is not determined.

  When the small combination / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, “C_HOM_B” to “C_HOM_J” and “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” are determined as the internal winning combination ( (See FIG. 25 and FIG. 26). When the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, it is changed to “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” on condition that the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”. The corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, when the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, the stop order is “right / left / right” or “right / left / left” as in “reverse-pressed navigation (navigating to the white BAR)”. Even so, the combination of symbols “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” is not stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that neither “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, or “Battle rush 2 winning” has been determined.

  When “C_HOM_B”, “C_HOM_E” to “C_HOM_G” are determined as internal winning combinations, if the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing, “white BAR” − “white BAR” until the second stop. "-" White BAR "symbol combination is a stop mode (so-called" Tempai ") that can stop display along a straight line. In the third stop, the symbol combination of “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” is not stopped and displayed.

  After the processing of S568 and S569, or when S564 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RB flag is on (S570).

  In S570, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RB flag is on (when S570 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an RB ART lottery process based on an RB ART lottery table (not shown). Alternatively, the RB BR lottery process is performed based on the RB BR lottery table (not shown) (S571).

  Specifically, if the RB is in a non-ART and the data pointer (winning number) for the small role / replay is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, the number of ART sets in the RB Perform lottery processing. On the other hand, if it is an RB in ART and the small role / replay data pointer (winning number) is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, a BR lottery process in RB is performed.

  After the processing of S571 or when S571 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB middle / high probability counter is 1 or more (S572). In S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB medium / high probability counter is 1 or more (when S572 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the BB medium / high probability counter (S573). .

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S572 that the BB medium / high probability counter is not 1 or more (when S572 is NO), the sub CPU 102 decrements the value of the pseudo bonus medium game number counter by “1” ( S574).

  After the processes of S573 and S574, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter is 1 or more (S575). In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the counter game number during pseudo bonus is 1 or more (when S 575 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during pseudo bonus and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the time process (see FIG. 103).

  In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter is not 1 or more (when S575 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo bonus end process (S576).

In the process at the end of the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 turns off the flag corresponding to the type of the pseudo bonus that has ended. In addition, when the ART flag is on and the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 performs ART start processing. If the type of the pseudo bonus that has been completed is SBB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART flag and performs ART start processing. Further, when “1” or “2” is stored in the BR stock storage area, the sub CPU 102 performs BR start processing.
After the process of S576, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the pseudo bonus, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the processing during ART performed in S544 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (S581). The BR flag refers to either the BR flag 1 or the BR flag 2.

  In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is not off (when S581 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) Bonus lottery processing is performed (S582).

  When “bonus winning” is determined by the bonus lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 performs bonus distribution lottery processing based on a bonus distribution lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of bonus (pseudo bonus). Then, a flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and a preparation flag (“SBB preparation flag”, “BB preparation flag” or “RB preparation flag) )).

  After the process of S582, the sub CPU 102 performs an extra lottery process based on an extra lottery table (not shown) (S583). When the number of additional games is determined by this additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of additional games to the ART game number counter. Note that the BR lottery process may be performed separately from the extra lottery process.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “preparing flag (ART preparing flag)” is ON or the navigation return waiting state flag is ON (S584). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S584 that the preparation flag is on or the navigation return waiting state flag is on (in the case where S584 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing. The process moves to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag is not on and the navigation return waiting state flag is not on (when S584 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the ART game number counter. "1" is subtracted (S585).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART pull back process (S586). The details of the ART pullback process will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequent to the processing of S586, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (when S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a value of the additional added game number counter of 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (S587).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S587 that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” or more (when S587 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the additional added game number counter from “1”. (S588). Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional additional game number counter is “1” and the additional additional A flag is on (S589).

  In S589, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” and the additional added A flag is ON (when S589 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the added additional A value. G number lottery processing is performed (S590). In the additional addition A addition G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional addition A addition G number lottery table (see FIG. 61), and adds the determined addition game number to the ART game number counter. . After the processing of S590, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  In S589, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional additional game number counter is “1” and the additional additional A flag is not on (when S589 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional additional games. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is “0” (S591).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S591 that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “0” (when S591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “0” in S591 (when S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional added C flag (“addition added C1 flag”, “ It is determined whether or not the “additional additional C2 flag” or “additional additional C3 flag” is on (S592).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional extra C flag is on in S592 (when S592 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an extra extra C extra G number lottery process (S593). In other words, the additional extra C extra G number lottery process in S593 is performed before the additional extra C extra G number lottery process based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14 (one bet button 15) is completed. It is executed when

  In the additional extra C extra G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the extra game number based on the additional extra C extra G number lottery table (see FIG. 63), and adds the determined extra game number to the extra game number counter. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is “continuation” (S594). If “1” or more is determined as the additional game number by the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing of S593, it becomes “continuation”, and “0” is determined as the additional game number by the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing. If it is, “No continuation” is displayed.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that “continuation” is determined in S594 (when S594 is YES), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S593, and adds the additional game C addition G number lottery process in S593 as the number of games to be added. The processes of S593 and S594 are repeated until “0” is determined. It should be noted that even if the number of times of performing the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing reaches a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times), “no continuation” is determined and the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing is terminated. Good. Further, when the number of lottery processes for additional addition C addition G number reaches the specified number of times, even if the lottery result is “continue”, the sub CPU 102 determines “no continuation”, The additional addition C addition G number lottery processing may be terminated.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S594 that it is not “continuation” (in the case where S594 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional extra C end process (S595). In the process at the time of completion of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 selects the corresponding additional addition flag (“addition addition A flag”, “addition addition B flag”, “addition addition C1 flag”, “addition addition C2 flag” or “addition addition C3”. Flag ") off. Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter, and clears the value of the additional game number counter.

  After the process of S595 or when S592 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs a BR continuation process (S596). The details of the BR continuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S596, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S587 that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” or more (when S587 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR continuation flag is “1” or more. Is determined (S600).

  In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is “1” or more (in the case of YES determination in S600), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition and promotion lottery processing (S601).

  In the additional addition and promotion lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the addition contents based on the additional addition and promotion lottery table (see FIG. 60), and adds an additional addition flag (“addition addition A flag”, “Additional addition B flag”, “Additional addition C1 flag”, “Additional addition C2 flag” or “Additional addition C3 flag”) are turned on.

  Note that only one of the additional additional flags is turned on. In addition, even if the additional addition moves up, it does not move down. For example, if the added content determined this time is higher than the previously determined added content, the additional added flag corresponding to the previously determined added content is turned off, and the additional added flag corresponding to the added content determined this time is turned on. . On the other hand, if the added content determined this time is lower than the previously determined added content, the additional added flag corresponding to the previously determined added content is kept on.

  In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not “1” or more (when S600 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a BR continuous rewriting lottery process (S602).

  In the BR continuous rewriting lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery as to whether or not to rewrite “non-continuous” of BR to “continuous” based on a BR continuous rewriting lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to rewrite “non-continuation” of BR to “continuation”, BR continuation processing is performed (see FIG. 108).

  After the processing of S601 and S602, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the BR game number counter (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR game number counter is “1” or more (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is “1” or more (when S604 is YES), the sub CPU 102 terminates the ART processing, and executes the process upon start command reception ( The process proceeds to S546 in FIG.

  In step S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is not “1” or more (when S604 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR continuation flag is “1” or more. (S605).

  In step S605, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not “1” or more (in the case where S605 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs BR termination processing (S606). In the BR end process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR flag (“BR1 flag 1” or “BR2 flag”). Further, when the flag that is turned off is the “BR2 flag”, or when the number of BR continuations is a predetermined number (for example, “20 or more”), the sub CPU 102 determines that the “SBB flag” and the “SBB preparation flag” And “BR1 flag” are turned on. After the processing of S606, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  In S605, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is “1” or more (in the case where S605 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an extra lottery process during BR continuation (S607). In the BR continuing addition process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of added games based on the BR continuing addition lottery table (not shown), and adds the determined added number of games to the value of the ART game number counter. Note that in the BR lottery adding lottery process according to the present embodiment, “0” is not determined as the number of additional games, but a predetermined number (for example, “10”) or more is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional addition flag is on (S608). In S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional extra flag is on (in the case where S608 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “2” to the value of the additional extra game number counter (S609). After the processing of S609, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  In S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional extra flag is not on (when S608 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuation processing (S610). After the processing of S610, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the ART pullback process performed in S586 in the flowchart of the ART process (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described. The ART pullback process is a process of performing a so-called pullback, in which “50” is set again in the ART game number counter with a predetermined probability while the sub gaming state is the second ART.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (S611).

  In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0” (in the case where S611 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART pullback process and also performs the ART processing (FIG. 105 and FIG. 106) also ends.

  In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (when S611 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an ART pull-back lottery process (S612). In the ART pull-back lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process using a random number on the program, and when the lottery result is a win, the sub CPU 102 sets “50” in the ART game number counter again. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 subtracts a predetermined lottery value from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment), and when the result of the subtraction is negative, Judgment is true. The value of the predetermined lottery value can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, for example, it is set to “3000” so that the probability of pulling back is 1% or less.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (S613). If the withdrawal is not performed in the ART withdrawal lottery process of S612, since the value of the ART game number counter remains “0”, the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is “0”. It discriminate | determines (S613 YES determination). Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART pull-back process and also ends the ART process (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

  When the withdrawal is performed in the ART withdrawal lottery process of S612, since the ART game number counter is set to “50” again, the sub CPU 613 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0”. (S613 NO determination). Then, the sub CPU 102 turns on the navigation return waiting state flag (see FIG. 77) (S614), ends the ART pullback processing, and also ends the ART processing (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[BR continuation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the BR continuation process performed in S595 and S606 in the flowchart of the ART process (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR continuation flag (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds “10” to the value of the BR game number counter (S622). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BR continuation flag is “1” (S623).

  In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation flag is “1” (when S623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag and stores “ 2 ”is set (stored) (S624).

  In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR successive continuation flag is not “1” (when S623 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a BR continuous lottery process (S625). In the BR continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue BR based on the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue BR in S625 is determined (S626). In S626, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not determined to continue BR (when S626 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation process and also performs the ART processing (FIGS. 105 and 105). 106) also ends.

  After the process of S624 or when S626 is YES, the sub CPU 102 performs a BR continuation determination process (S627). Details of the BR continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S627, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation process and also ends the ART process (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[BR continuation decision processing]
Next, the BR continuation determination time process performed in S627 in the BR continuation time process flowchart (see FIG. 108) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition lottery processing during BR (S641). In the additional addition lottery processing during BR, the sub CPU 102 determines the content of additional addition based on the additional addition lottery table during BR. Then, an additional addition flag (“addition addition A flag”, “addition addition B flag”, “addition addition C1 flag”, “addition addition C2 flag”, or “addition addition C3 flag”) corresponding to the determined additional addition contents is displayed. Turn on.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag (S642). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BR lottery continuous lottery process (S643). In the BB successive round lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue the BR successive rounds based on a BR successive round lottery table (not shown). If it is decided to “continue” the next BR, the “1” is stored in the BR continuous storage area. If the value of the BR successive storage area is “2”, the BR consecutive lottery process is not performed. After the process of S643, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation determination process and also ends the BR continuation process (see FIG. 108).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the normal middle process performed in S545 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the start command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ is in progress (S661). During CZ, the CZ flag is on, and the CZ precursor flag is off. In S661, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the CZ is not in progress (when S661 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a mode lottery process (S662).

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of modes having different CZ winning rates and bonus (pseudo bonus) winning rates in the general state are provided. In the mode lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines a mode based on a mode lottery table (not shown) and shifts to the determined mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ entry lottery processing (S663). In the CZ entry lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ is won based on a CZ entry lottery table (not shown). When the CZ winning is determined, the CZ flag and the CZ precursor flag corresponding to the determined CZ are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on a precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined number of precursor games is stored in the precursor game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs bonus lottery processing based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) (S664). When the bonus winning process is determined by the bonus lottery process, the type of bonus (“SBB”, “BB” or “RB”) is determined based on a bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, a flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) corresponding to the determined bonus and a precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on a precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined number of precursor games is stored in the precursor game number counter. After the process of S664, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal process and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

In S661, when the sub CPU 102 determines that CZ is in progress (when S661 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs cut-in addition lottery processing during CZ (S665). In the CZ cut-in addition lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to add “1” to the specified number of times based on the CZ cut-in addition lottery table (see FIG. 51). If it is determined to add “1” to the specified number of times, “1” is added to the CI number counter in CZ.
In addition, as the cut-in addition lottery process during CZ according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it may be determined whether or not to add “2” or more to the specified number of times.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) is won (S666). When determining in S666 that the sub CPU 102 has won the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) (when S666 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that “reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the black BAR)”. Is set (S667).

  If the winning number is “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”), the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left” and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR) As a result, the symbol combinations related to “C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E” are stopped and displayed. Accordingly, when the winning number “4” is won and the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”, “black BAR” − “black BAR” corresponding to “C_BAR_A” is determined depending on the timing of the stop operation. ”-“ Black BAR ”symbol combination may be stopped. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) is won, “reverse push navigation (navigating to the black BAR)” is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) is won during CZ, the winning of the bonus is determined. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed according to “reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the black BAR)” and the combination of symbols “black BAR”-“black BAR”-“black BAR” is stopped and displayed, It is possible to recognize that a bonus (pseudo bonus) has been won.

  After the process of S667, the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus winning process (S668). In the bonus winning process, the sub CPU 102 determines a bonus type (“SBB”, “BB”, or “RB”) based on a bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, a flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) corresponding to the determined bonus and a preparation flag (“SBB preparation flag”, “BB preparation flag” or “RB preparation flag”). )

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end time processing (S669). In the CZ end process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the CZ flag, and clears the values of the CZ game number counter and the CZ in-count CI counter. After the process of S669, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S666 that the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) has not been won (when S666 is NO), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the CZ game number counter. (S670).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in occurrence lottery process during CZ (S671). In the CZ cut-in occurrence lottery process, it is determined whether or not a cut-in (“reverse-pushing navigation (aiming at the black BAR)”) is generated based on the CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table (see FIG. 52). .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the occurrence of cut-in has been won (S672). In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the occurrence of cut-in has not been won (when S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal mid-process, and the process is performed when the start command is received ( The process proceeds to S546 in FIG.

  In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the occurrence of cut-in has been won (when S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “reverse-pressed navigation (navigating to the black BAR)” (S673). ).

  In the present embodiment, when “losing” is determined by the internal lottery process, in S671, whether or not to generate a cut-in (“reverse push navigation (aiming at the black BAR)”) is determined. Therefore, even if it is determined in S671 that the cut-in is to be generated and the stop operation is performed in accordance with “reverse-push navigation (navigating black BAR)”, “black BAR” − “black BAR” − “black BAR”. The combination of symbols is not stopped.

  In the stop table selected at the time of “losing” in the present embodiment, when the stop order is “middle right” and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR), a right display is displayed. The number of sliding pieces capable of stopping the “black BAR” is set in the window 4R and the middle display window 4C. Thereby, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the combination of symbols “black BAR”-“black BAR”-“black BAR” is stopped and displayed until the second stop.

  After the processing of S673, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the CI number counter in CZ (S674). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the CI number counter in CZ is “0” (S675). In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter in CZ is not “0” (NO in S675), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

  In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter in CZ is “0” (when S675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S676). Details of the causal value related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end time processing (S677). After the process of S677, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Causal value related processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the causal value related process performed in S676 in the flowchart of the normal process (see FIG. 110) and S723 in the flowchart of the process in preparation (see FIG. 112) will be described.
In addition, the causal value related process of this embodiment is performed at various timings based on conditions according to various causal value lottery tables.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value accumulation lottery process (S701). In the causal value accumulation lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines a causal value based on various causal value accumulation lottery tables (see FIGS. 64 to 72), and adds the determined causal value to the causal value counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (S702). In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed “100” (when S702 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing and performs normal processing ( The process proceeds to S677 in FIG. 110) or S724 in the process under preparation (see FIG. 112).

  In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (when S702 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the causal value stock counter (S703). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “100” from the value of the causal value counter (S704). After the processing of S704, the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing and shifts the processing to S677 of normal processing (see FIG. 110) or S724 of preparing processing (see FIG. 112).

[Processing in preparation]
Next, referring to FIG. 112, the preparation process performed in S546 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not preparation is in progress (S721). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S721 that it is not in preparation (if S721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the preparation process and proceeds to S547 in the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

  In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is preparing (when S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the preparing digested G number counter (S722). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S723).

  After the process of S723, the sub CPU 102 refers to the operation condition table (see FIG. 76) and determines whether or not the operation condition is satisfied (S724). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S724 that the operating condition is not satisfied (when S724 is NO), the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding preparation flag and clears the value of the preparation digestion G counter. (S725). After the process of S725, the sub CPU 102 ends the process in preparation and moves the process to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Precursor check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the precursor check process performed in S547 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the start command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the warning is in progress (S741). During the precursor, the value of the precursor game number counter is “1” or more. When the sub CPU 102 determines in S741 that the warning is not in progress (when S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the warning check process and proceeds to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S741 that the warning is in progress (when S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 decrements the value of the warning game number counter by “1” (S742). However, if the preparation flag is on, the value of the precursor game number counter is not subtracted by “1”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter has become “0” (S473). In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not “0” (when S743 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S548 of the time process (see FIG. 103).

  In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter has become “0” (when S743 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the CZ start time (S744). . Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the CZ start time based on the CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”).

  In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a CZ start time (when S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ start time process (S745).

  In the CZ start time process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag, and sets an initial value corresponding to the type of the CZ flag in the CI number counter in CZ. In the present embodiment, the initial value when the CZ1 flag is on is “4”, and the initial value when the CZ2 flag is on is “10”. After the process of S745, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the start of CZ (when S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a bonus start time (S746). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a bonus start time based on a precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) related to the pseudo bonus.

  In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a bonus start time (when S746 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus start time process (S747). In the bonus start process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and performs a bonus start process in accordance with the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag”, or “RB flag”) relating to the pseudo bonus being turned on. Do.

  When the SBB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the SBB preparation flag, and when the BB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB preparation flag. When the RB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the RB preparation flag. After the process of S747, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus is not started (in the case where S746 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART (second ART) is started (S748). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART (second ART) is started based on the ART precursor flag.

  In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART (second ART) is started (when S748 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an ART start process (S749). In the ART start process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and turns on the ART preparation flag. However, if the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the ART ready flag is not turned on. Further, in the ART start process, the sub CPU 102 sets “50” in the ART game number counter. After the process of S749, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART (second ART) is not started (when S748 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the BR start time (S750). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a BR start time based on the BR precursor flag.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that it is not at the start of BR (when S750 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and executes the process at the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) S548. Move to.

  In S750, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the BR start time (when S750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR precursor flag (S751). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuation processing (S752). After the process of S752, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Direction lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the effect lottery process performed in S548 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the start command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect number lottery process (S761). In the effect number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to an effect number lottery table (not shown) and determines an effect number based on various parameters stored in the sub storage area. Then, the determined production number is stored in the sub storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (S762). In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is not the development effect (failure) (when S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S768.

  In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is the development effect (failure) (when S762 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs provisional causal value lottery processing (S763). . In the temporary causal value lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the temporary causal value lottery table and determines the temporary causal value based on the type of the development effect. Then, the determined provisional causal value is stored in the sub storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value determination process (S764). In the causal value determination process, the sub CPU 102 corrects the determined provisional causal value to the maximum value within the range of the internal points, and determines it as a causal value. Then, the determined causal value is added to the value of the causal value counter. Further, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the same value as the determined causal value from the value of the internal point counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (S765). In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed “100” (when S765 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S768.

  In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (when S765 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the value of the causal value stock (S766). .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “100” from the value of the causal value counter (S767). After the process of S767, when S762 or S765 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a lock effect is generated (S768). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a lock effect has occurred based on the parameters of the start command.

  In S768, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lock effect is not generated (when S768 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). To do. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lock effect is generated (YES in S768), the sub CPU 102 stores the effect number determined in S761 in the storage area after the end of the lock effect (S769).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a fake effect parameter lottery process (S770). The fake effect parameter is a parameter for determining the effect number of the fake effect by the same process as the normal effect number lottery process (performed in S761), and is a parameter instead of the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is during the development effect or the confirmation screen (S771). The confirmation screen means that a screen notifying that the bonus has been determined is being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S771 that it is not in the development effect or the finalized screen (when S771 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the effect number lottery process using the fake effect parameter determined in S770 ( S772). After the process of S772, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the development effect is in progress or the finalized screen (if S771 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a fake push order navigation effect lottery process (S773). After the process of S773, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Reel stop command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the reel stop command reception process performed in S525 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (S781). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S781 that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” (when S781 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and produces the process. The process proceeds to S526 in the content determination process (see FIG. 102).

  In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (when S781 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional added B flag is on. (S782). In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional extra B flag is not on (in the case where S782 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process, and the process is determined as an effect content determination process (FIG. 102).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S782 that the additional extra B flag is on (when S782 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an extra extra B extra G number lottery process (S783). In the additional addition B addition G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional addition B addition G number lottery table, and adds the determined additional game number to the addition game number counter.

  In addition addition B addition G number lottery processing, the number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is referred to. The number of added games determined by the previous stop operation is obtained by referring to the added game number counter.

  After the processing of S783, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a third stop operation (S784). When the sub CPU 102 determines in step S784 that the operation is not the third stop operation (NO in step S784), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process, and performs the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102). ) To S526.

  In S784, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation is the third stop operation (when S784 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional extra B end process (S785). In the process at the time of completion of the additional addition B, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition B flag. Further, the value of the added game number counter is added to the ART game number counter, and the value of the added game number counter is cleared. After the process of S785, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process, and moves the process to S526 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102).

[Process when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the display command reception process performed in S528 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described. In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub game state transition process and a penalty determination process for shifting the sub game state based on the winning mode.

  First, the sub CPU 102 refers to various flags in the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and determines whether or not the sub gaming state is normal (S801). The sub CPU 102 stores the “CZ1 flag”, “CZ2 flag”, “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, “RB flag”, “ART flag”, “BR1 flag”, “BR2 flag” and “ART” in the sub storage area. With reference to “in preparation flag”, when these flags are off, it is determined that the sub gaming state is in the normal state.

  In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is normal (when S801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs normal sub game state transition processing (S802). Specifically, when the CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”) in the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) is on and the number of CZ precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 displays the sub gaming state. Transition into CZ. The sub CPU 102 wins a pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag in the sub storage area is ON and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state between the flags. Further, when the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the ART precursor flag is OFF, and the ART precursor number is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to ART preparation. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the normal sub gaming state transition process (S802).

  In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not normal (when S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ flag in the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and the sub gaming state is It is determined whether or not CZ is in progress (S803). When the CZ flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is CZ.

  In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is in the CZ (when S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a sub gaming state transition process in the CZ (S804). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag in the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state between the flags. Further, when the CI counter in CZ is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to normal. Then, after the sub game state transition processing in CZ (S804), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S816.

  In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not in the CZ state (when S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART ready flag (see FIG. 77) in the sub storage area, and executes the sub game. It is determined whether or not the state is the ART preparation (S805). When the ART ready flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is ART ready.

  In S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is being prepared for ART (when S805 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs sub gaming state transition processing during the preparation of ART (S806). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag in the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state between the flags. In addition, when any of the “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” wins the ART entry replay, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to ART. Further, when the stop operation is performed by the player in a stop order different from the notified stop order, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to ART. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S806) in preparation for ART.

  In S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not in the ART preparation state (when S805 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART flag (see FIG. 77) in the sub storage area, and determines the sub game state. It is determined whether or not ART is in progress (S807). When the ART flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is ART.

  In S807, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is ART (when S807 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the navigation return waiting flag in the sub storage area (see FIG. 77). Whether the navigation return wait state flag is on and whether the first stop operation (first stop operation) has been performed on other than the left reel 3L, or the navigation return wait state flag is on, and Then, it is determined whether or not the predetermined winning number relating to the stop order notification, that is, whether or not the predetermined winning number relating to the stop order notification is determined by the main control circuit 91 is determined. Based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order. The predetermined winning number relating to the notification of the stop order during ART (second ART) is, for example, the above-described winning numbers “12” and “25”.

In S808, when it is determined that the navigation return wait state flag is on and the first stop operation has been performed on other than the left reel 3L, or when the navigation return wait state flag is on and a predetermined order related to the notification of the stop order is set. If it is a winning number (YES in S808), the sub CPU 102 turns off the navigation return waiting state flag (S809). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S810.
In the present embodiment, when the navigation return waiting state flag is on, the sub gaming state is “second ART”, but the liquid crystal display device 11 has a normal state (for example, the sub gaming state is “general state”). The same screen as that displayed at () is displayed. In this case, a stop operation by pushing forward is recommended. Therefore, when the stop operation (an irregular pressing) is performed in a stopping order other than the forward pressing when the navigation return waiting state flag is on, a predetermined winning number relating to the notification of the stopping order is determined by the main CPU 93 as a penalty. Even if not, the navigation return waiting state flag is set to OFF. Therefore, the ART game number counter is subtracted from the next game (see S584 and S585 in FIG. 105).

  In S808, when the navigation return waiting state flag is off, when it is not determined that the first stop operation (the first stop operation) is performed on other than the left reel 3L, or when the stop order is notified. When it is not the predetermined winning number (when S809 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S810.

  In S810, the sub CPU performs a sub gaming state transition process during ART. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag in the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state between the flags. Further, when the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to normal. Further, when the BR game number counter is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to BR. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S816 after the sub gaming state transition processing during ART (S810).

  In S807, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not in ART (when S807 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the BR1 flag and the BR2 flag (see FIG. 77) in the sub storage area. It is determined whether or not the gaming state is BR (S811). When the BR1 flag or the BR2 flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is BR.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S811 that the sub gaming state is BR (when S811 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a sub gaming state transition process during BR (S812). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32” (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area, and “1” and “2” are stored in both. If there is no BR stock, the BR game number counter is 0 and the SBB is won, that is, if there is an SBB stock, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state between the flags. Further, if the sub CPU 102 has no BR stock and the BR game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to ART. Then, after the sub game state transition process in BR (S812), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S811 that the sub gaming state is not BR (when S811 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the flag between flags in the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and determines the sub gaming state. It is determined whether or not the flag is between (S813). When the flag between flags is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is between flags.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S813 that the sub gaming state is between flags (in the case of YES determination in S813), the sub CPU 102 performs a sub gaming state transition process between flags (S814). Specifically, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to during the first ART, that is, during the pseudo bonus. Further, when the stop operation is performed by the player in a stop order different from the notified stop order, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the pseudo bonus. Then, after the sub game state transition process between flags (S814), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub gaming state transition process during the pseudo bonus (S815). Specifically, when the bonus winning game number counter is 0 and the pseudo bonus is not won during the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to normal. In addition, when the bonus winning game number counter is 0 and the pseudo bonus is won during the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state between the flags. Further, when the bonus winning game number counter is 0 and the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to ART preparation. Then, after the sub game state transition process (S815) in the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816.

  The sub CPU 102 performs a penalty determination process in S816. In the penalty determination process, the sub CPU 102 turns on a pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) when a stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and a pseudo bonus is established. Details of the penalty determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequent to the penalty determination process (S816), the sub CPU 102 ends the display command reception process.

[Penalty judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the penalty determination process performed in S816 in the flowchart (see FIG. 116) of the display command reception process will be described. The penalty determination process is a process of turning on a pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) when a stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and a pseudo bonus is established.

  For example, when the determined type of the pseudo bonus is RB and the rotation stop numbers (see FIG. 48) are “14” to “17”, the sub CPU 102 determines the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS * 2”. The stop order for stopping and displaying (a combination of symbols for starting the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is RB when stopped) is notified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, when the rotation stop numbers are “14” and “15”, “middle right and left” or “middle right and left” is notified as the stop order. When the rotation stop numbers are “16” and “17”, “left middle right” or “middle left and right” is notified as the stop order. Then, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order and the symbol combination related to “C_BNS * 2” is stopped and displayed, the first ART whose type of pseudo bonus is RB is started.

  However, even if the determined pseudo bonus type is RB and the rotation stop numbers are “14” and “15” and the sub CPU 102 notifies “stop left middle” or “right center left” as the stop order, The person may not perform the stop order and perform the stop operation in the “left middle right” or “right and left middle” stop order. Further, even if the determined pseudo bonus type is RB and the rotation stop numbers are “16” and “17” and the sub CPU 102 reports “left middle right” or “left and right middle” as the stop order, the game In some cases, the user does not follow the stop order and performs the stop operation in the stop order of “right middle left” or “right middle left”. In these cases, when the symbol combination related to “C_BNS * 1” is stopped and displayed, the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is BB is started. As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is established, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag in the penalty determination process. At this time, the sub CPU 102 turns off the RB flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and turns on the BB flag. In addition, when the type of the determined pseudo bonus is BB and the stop operation is performed in accordance with the stop order notified by the player, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS * 2” is stopped and displayed. Also, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag in the penalty determination process. At this time, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BB flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and turns on the RB flag. Note that the sub CPU 102 turns off the pseudo bonus penalty flag when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus started when the pseudo bonus is established ends.

  As shown in FIG. 117, first, in the penalty determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is being performed (S817). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and if any of the “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, and “RB flag” is ON, it is determined that the pseudo bonus is being set. If the flag is not on, it is determined that the pseudo bonus is not in effect.

  If it is determined in S817 that the pseudo bonus is not being performed (NO in S817), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

  If it is determined in S817 that the pseudo bonus is being performed (YES in S817), the sub CPU 102 performs a stop operation in a stop order different from the notified stop order as to whether or not the pseudo bonus is established by ignoring navigation. It is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S818). When the stop operation is performed in the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is won, the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is not established by ignoring the navigation.

  In S818, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus has not been established by ignoring navigation (when S818 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

  If it is determined in S818 that a pseudo bonus has been established by ignoring navigation (YES in S818), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) in the sub storage area (S819). After S819, the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the non-operation command reception process performed in S537 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (S820). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” in S820 (when S820 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S827.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S820 that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (when S820 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional added C flag is on. (S821). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S821 that the additional extra C flag is not on (when S821 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S827.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S821 that the additional additional C flag is on (when S821 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S822). The number of inserted games is the number of games that can be started, which means that a start operation can be accepted.

  In S822, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S822 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S827. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the inserted number is the game start possible number (S822 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BET switch 62 is on (S823). The BET switch 62 performs on-edge detection when the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is pressed.

  In S823, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 62 is not on (when S823 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S827. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in step S823 that the BET switch 62 is on (in the case where S823 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C addition G number lottery processing (S824).

  In the additional addition C addition G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional addition C addition G number lottery table. Then, the determined additional game number is added to the value of the additional game number counter. In addition, in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process, when the number of additional games of “1” or more is determined, “continuation” of the additional addition C is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not “continuation” is determined in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S825). When the sub CPU 102 determines that “continuation” is determined in S825 (when S825 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827.

  In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that “continuation” has not been determined (NO in S825), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional extra C end process (S826). In the process at the time of completion of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition C flag (“addition addition C1 flag”, “addition addition C2 flag”, or “addition addition C3 flag”). Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the added game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter. Then, the value of the added game number counter is cleared.

  After the process of S826, when S820, S821, S822, or S823 is 23NO determination, and S825 is YES determination, the sub CPU102 performs the lock effect control process (S827). Details of the lock effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later. After the process of S827, the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102).

[Lock effect control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the lock effect control process performed in S827 in the flowchart of the no-operation command reception process (see FIG. 118) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the RT4 gaming state (S828). Information on the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is sent from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as a parameter such as a start command. In S828, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when S828 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S832.

  In S828, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when S828 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is preparing for the ART or in the first ART (pseudo bonus). It is determined whether or not (S829). In S829, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not other than the ART preparation or the first ART (pseudo bonus) (when S829 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S832.

  In S829, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not during the ART preparation or the first ART (pseudo bonus) (when S829 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is locked under the control of the main CPU 93. It is determined whether or not the production brake is started (S830).

  When a lock effect (hereinafter referred to as “main lock effect”) under the control of the main CPU 93 according to the present embodiment is started, first, the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated forward. Next, brakes are generated on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R to stop the forward rotation. Then, after the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are reversely rotated, the main lock effect is ended. Information indicating that forward rotation, braking, stopping, and reverse rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been started is included in, for example, a no-operation command.

  In S830, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the brake for the main lock effect has not started (when S830 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S832.

  In S830, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect braking has started (when S830 is YES), the sub CPU 102 starts a delay count (S831). In this process, the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 is set in the delay counter. After the process of S831, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control process and also ends the no-operation command reception process (see FIG. 118).

  When S828, S829, or S830 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the delay count is being performed (S832). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S832 that the delay count is not being performed (S832 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S837.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S832 that the delay is being counted (when S832 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the main lock effect is being performed (S833). In S833, when the sub CPU102 determines that the main lock effect is not being performed (NO in S833), the sub CPU102 shifts the process to S837.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect is being performed in S833 (when S833 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1000000. Is determined (S834).

  In this embodiment, in S831, the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 is acquired and set in the delay counter. That is, using the number of clocks of the sub CPU acquired in S831 as a starting point for counting, it is determined whether or not the number of clocks obtained by adding 1000000 clocks to the number of clocks is acquired from the sub CPU 102.

  In this embodiment, when the number of clocks obtained by adding 1000000 clocks to the number of clocks set in the delay counter is acquired from the sub CPU 102, one second has elapsed since the time when the number of clocks of the sub CPU was set in the delay counter. To do. Therefore, in S831, it is determined whether one second has elapsed since the occurrence of the main lock effect brake.

  In S834, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 does not exceed 1000000 (when S834 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S837.

  In S834, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1000000 (when S834 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs sub-block effect determination processing ( S835). In the sub-block effect determination process, a lock effect (hereinafter referred to as “sub-block effect”) controlled by the sub CPU 102 is determined in accordance with the internal winning combination, the sub game state, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 ends the delay count (S836). In this process, the value of the delay counter is cleared.

  After the process of S836, when S832, S833, or S834 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the main lock effect has ended (S837). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect using the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has ended. In S837, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect has not ended (when S837 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control process and also receives the no-operation command process (FIG. 118). See also).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect has ended in S837 (when S837 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect number stored in the storage area after the lock effect ends (S838). Thereby, the effect determined before the game lock is generated (the effect determined before the fake effect and the sub-block effect are performed) is executed after the game lock ends.

  After the process of S838, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control process and also ends the no-operation command reception process (see FIG. 118).

[Directions related to game lock]
Next, an effect performed when a game lock occurs will be described.

  In the present embodiment, lottery is performed as to whether or not a game lock is to be generated during the RT4 gaming state (see FIGS. 39 and 82). When the occurrence of a game lock is determined, the game lock is started, and even if a closing operation or a stop operation is performed until a predetermined period elapses, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

  During the period in which the game lock is generated, the main CPU 93 (main control circuit 91) executes the main lock effect. This main lock effect is a reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are operated in the order of forward rotation, brake, stop, and reverse rotation.

  On the other hand, when the game lock is generated, the sub CPU 102 stores the effect number determined by the effect number lottery process in the storage area after the lock effect is finished (S769 in FIG. 114). Then, the fake effect is determined and executed (see S770 and S772 in FIG. 114). This fake effect can be determined by a normally performed effect number lottery process by using fake effect parameters. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of program design and debugging related to fake effect lottery.

  The fake effect is the same as the effect executed in a normal game (a game in which no game lock occurs), and is performed using the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, and the like. Therefore, the player cannot discriminate whether it is a fake effect during game lock or an effect executed in a normal game. As a result, during the forward rotation of the main lock effect and during the execution of the fake effect, the player can be mistaken for the normal game being started.

  When the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the sub CPU 102 (sub control circuit 101) uses the number of clocks of the CPU to count until one second has elapsed since the brake was generated (see S830, S831, and S834 in FIG. 119). ). Then, when 1 second has elapsed since the occurrence of the brake of the main lock effect, the sub-block effect is determined and executed (see S835 in FIG. 119). That is, when one second has elapsed since the occurrence of the main lock effect brake, the effect performed using the display device is changed from the fake effect to the sub-block effect.

In the sub-block effect, transition to a pseudo bonus (first ART) or ART (second ART) using the liquid crystal display device 11 or the speakers 20L and 20R (transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player) Informs that it has been determined. That is, in the subblock effect, an image different from the image displayed in the effect executed in the normal game is displayed.
When the game lock and the main lock effect are completed, an effect corresponding to the effect number stored in the storage area after the lock effect ends is performed under the control of the sub CPU 102.

  In this way, in this embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate forward in the same manner as when a normal game is performed, and then a brake is generated. However, the fake effect (the same effect as that performed in a normal game) under the control of the sub CPU 102 is continued for one second after the brake is generated. As a result, the player can be given a sense of incongruity, and the expectation can be increased with respect to notification of information by the effect related to the game lock.

  Next, the accessory control task, the lamp control task, the sound control task, and the animation control task executed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. These tasks (processes) are executed in parallel by the sub CPU 102. These tasks are repeatedly executed by the sub CPU 102 at a cycle of 33 msec.

[Property control task]
First, the accessory control task will be described with reference to FIG. The accessory control task is a task for performing management control of the rotating accessory 123.

  In S901 of the accessory control task, the sub CPU 102 extracts the accessory data registered in S518 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and moves the process to S902 (S901). Note that if there is no registered accessory data (including the case where it has already been extracted), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S902.

  In step S902, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is registered accessory data (S902). If it is determined in S902 that there is no registered accessory data (NO in S902), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S905.

  If it is determined in S902 that there is a registered accessory data (YES in S902), the sub CPU 102 acquires a feature effect sequence from the accessory sequence table based on the extracted accessory data (S903). . The accessory effect sequence includes data indicating an effect pattern related to the rotating accessory 123 (data indicating a rotation direction, the number of rotations, a rotation time, and the like, hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an accessory pattern data). The accessory effect sequence may be composed of a single accessory effect pattern data or a combination of a plurality of accessory effect pattern data. Some of the accessory pattern data constituting the accessory effect sequence has a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the accessory pattern data. As the start condition, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the rotation start of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the press of the stop button in the third stop operation, the so-called third stop operation ON (ON edge), release of pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation OFF (OFF edge, display command reception), payout. In addition, in the accessory effect sequence, for each accessory pattern data constituting the accessory effect sequence, the accessory pattern data is an accessory pattern data related to the accessory interlocking effect described below (hereinafter referred to as interlocked accessory pattern data and Data indicating whether or not there is a case of being referred to). The accessory effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of accessory effect sequences, and associates the accessory data with the accessory effect sequence.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired accessory effect sequence as accessory effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S904).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an accessory effect sequence data update process (S905). In this process, it is determined whether or not the start condition of each accessory pattern data constituting the set accessory effect sequence data is correct. If it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the rotating accessory 123 is used with the pattern of the accessory pattern data. Is instructed to operate the accessory control board 78. For example, the accessory data registered in S518 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) is the accessory data A, and the start of the accessory pattern data A constituting the accessory effect sequence data A associated with the accessory data A When the condition is the first stop operation, when the sub control circuit 101 receives the reel stop command related to the first stop operation, the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition of the accessory pattern data A is satisfied, and the accessory pattern data An operation is instructed to the accessory control board 78 so that the rotating accessory 123 operates in the pattern A.

  In addition, when the accessory pattern data following the accessory pattern data A constituting the accessory effect sequence data A is the accessory pattern data B, and the start condition of the accessory pattern data B is the second stop operation, the accessory pattern data If the sub control circuit 101 receives a reel stop command related to the second stop operation while the rotating accessory 123 is operating in the pattern A, the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition of the accessory pattern data B is satisfied. Then, the sub CPU 102 instructs the accessory control board 78 to operate so that the rotating accessory 123 stops the operation with the pattern of the accessory pattern data A and operates with the pattern of the accessory pattern data B. In this case, when the rotating accessory 123 finishes the operation with the pattern of the accessory pattern data A before the sub control circuit 101 receives the reel stop command related to the second stop operation, the rotating accessory Whether the sub CPU 102 instructs the accessory control board 78 to perform an operation so that 123 performs an operation again (loops) with the pattern of the accessory pattern data A, or maintains a non-operating state. It can be arbitrarily set on the accessory effect sequence or on the accessory pattern data.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an accessory operation state information update process (S906). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores information indicating the operating state of the rotating accessory unit 122 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (such as an accessory pattern data relating to an instruction to the accessory control board 78 and an elapsed time from the instruction). Is stored or overwritten.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an accessory effect interlocking request process (S907). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory pattern data whose operation is instructed to the accessory control board 78 in S905 is the interlocking accessory pattern data. An operation start request is added (entry) to the lamp status information, sound playback status information, and animation playback status information. Further, when the operation of the rotating combination 123 with the pattern of the interlocking pattern data ends, the sub CPU 102 adds (entries) an interlocking end request to the lamp state information, the sound playback state information, and the animation playback state information. The sub CPU 102 determines the end timing of the operation of the rotating combination 123 in the pattern of the linked combination pattern data based on the count of the number of rotations, the elapsed time from the operation instruction, and the like.
Then, after S907, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S901.

[Ramp control task]
Next, the lamp control task will be described with reference to FIG. The lamp control task is a task for controlling the light output from the light source such as the head lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22.

  In S911 of the lamp control task, the sub CPU 102 extracts the lamp data registered in S517 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and moves the process to S912 (S911). If there is no registered lamp data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S912.

  In S912, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is registered lamp data (S912). If it is determined in S912 that there is no registered lamp data (NO in S912), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S915.

  If it is determined in S912 that there is registered lamp data (YES in S912), the sub CPU 102 acquires a lamp effect sequence from the lamp sequence table based on the extracted lamp data (S913). The lamp effect sequence is data indicating an effect pattern related to a light source such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 (lighting pattern, number of times of lighting, lighting time, brightness, color tone, etc., hereinafter referred to as lamp pattern data). ). The lamp effect sequence may be composed of a single lamp pattern data or a combination of a plurality of lamp pattern data. Some lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence is set with a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the lamp pattern data. As the start condition, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the rotation start of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the press of the stop button in the third stop operation, the so-called third stop operation ON (ON edge), release of pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation OFF (OFF edge, display command reception), payout. In addition, for each lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence, the lamp effect sequence is pattern data (hereinafter, linked lamp pattern data) related to a lamp accessory linked effect (see S919) described later. It includes data indicating whether or not. The lamp effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of lamp effect sequences, and associates lamp data with the lamp effect sequence. In the present embodiment, the data related to the reel lamp 22 among the lamp pattern data whose start condition is reception of the display command constituting the lamp effect sequence in the pseudo bonus indicates a pattern that blinks at a predetermined interval.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired lamp effect sequence as lamp effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S914).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a display command is received (S915). If it is determined in S915 that the display command is not received (NO in S915), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S918.

  If it is determined in S915 that the display command is being received (S915 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is in the pseudo bonus and the pseudo bonus penalty flag is on (S916). ). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and any of the “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, and “RB flag” is on, and the pseudo bonus penalty flag is on. It is determined whether or not. In S916, when it is determined that the sub gaming state is not in the pseudo bonus, or the pseudo bonus penalty flag is not on (when S916 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S918.

  In S916, when it is determined that the sub gaming state is the pseudo bonus and the pseudo bonus penalty flag is ON (when S916 is YES), the lamp pattern data of the reel lamp 22 in the lamp effect sequence data set in S914. Is changed to a full lighting pattern (S917). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 blinks the data related to the reel lamp 22 at predetermined intervals among the lamp pattern data whose start condition is display command reception (third stop operation off) in the lamp effect sequence data. To the all lighting pattern, that is, the pattern that lights up without flashing.

  In S918, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information (S918). The lamp status information is information indicating the status of the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 (lamp pattern data related to the instruction to the LED control board 72, elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Has been. The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entry) to the lamp state information in the accessory effect linkage request processing (S907) of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). In S918, when neither the operation start request nor the operation end request is included in the lamp state information (when S918 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S920.

  In S918, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information (when S918 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp accessory linked effect process (S919). In the lamp effect linked effect process, the sub CPU 102 instructs the LED control board 72 so that the lamp effect by the head lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 and the start timing and the end timing of the effect effect by the rotating character 123 are synchronized. I do. For example, in the case where the accessory pattern data A having the first stop operation as a start condition is a linked accessory pattern, and an operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), If the lamp effect sequence data A set in S914 and the lamp pattern data A having the first stop operation as a start condition is linked lamp pattern data, the head lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 etc. Is instructed to turn on the LED control board 72. If the operation end request related to the accessory pattern data A is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 uses the head lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 based on the lamp pattern data A. The LED control board 72 is instructed to stop (end) lighting such as. Even if the accessory pattern data A having the first stop operation as a start condition is a linked accessory pattern, and an operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), If the lamp effect sequence data B set in S914 is configured and the lamp pattern data B having the first stop operation as a start condition is not interlocked lamp pattern data, the sub CPU 102 instructs the lamp pattern data B in S919. Without performing the process, the process proceeds to S920.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs lamp effect sequence data update processing (S920). In this process, whether or not the start condition of each lamp pattern data constituting the set lamp effect sequence data is correct is determined. If it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the head lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 are used with the pattern of the lamp pattern data. Etc. are instructed to turn on the LED control board 72. If the lamp pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is the interlocking lamp pattern data, and the operation start request has not yet been entered in the lamp state information, the sub CPU 102 turns on the lighting related to the lamp pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Hold instructions. In this case, at the timing when the process proceeds to S918 and S919 after the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information, the sub CPU 102 issues a lighting instruction related to the lamp pattern data that has been suspended. Thereby, it is possible to synchronize the effect related to the interlocking accessory pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned accessory pattern data A, and the effect related to the interlocking lamp pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned lamp pattern data A. it can.

  The other points of the lamp effect sequence data update process are the same as the above-described accessory effect sequence data update process (S905 in FIG. 120), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs lamp operation state information update processing (S921). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the lamp state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S911.

Sound control task
Next, the sound control task will be described with reference to FIG. The sound control task is a task for controlling output of sound from the speakers 20L and 20R.

  In S931 of the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 extracts the sound data registered in S516 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and moves the process to S932 (S931). If there is no registered sound data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S932.

  In S932, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is registered sound data (S932). When it is determined that there is no registered sound data in S932 (when S932 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S935.

  If it is determined in S932 that there is sound data registered (YES in S932), the sub CPU 102 acquires a sound effect sequence from the sound sequence table based on the extracted sound data (S933). The sound effect sequence is composed of data indicating an effect pattern related to sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R (data indicating a wav file name, various parameters, volume, and the like, hereinafter sometimes referred to as sound pattern data). The sound effect sequence may be composed of a single sound pattern data or a plurality of sound pattern data. Various parameters define a corresponding channel number, a transfer rate per second (kbps (kilo bits per second)), presence / absence of loop reproduction, and presence / absence of chain reproduction. Some sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence has a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the sound pattern data. As the start condition, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the rotation start of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the press of the stop button in the third stop operation, the so-called third stop operation ON (ON edge), release of pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation OFF (OFF edge, display command reception), payout. In addition, for each sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence, whether the sound effect sequence is pattern data (hereinafter referred to as interlocking sound pattern data) related to a sound accessory interlocking effect (see S936) described later. It includes data indicating whether or not. The sound effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of sound effect sequences, and associates sound data with the sound effect sequence.

  In addition, the sound effect sequence related to the effect that displays the bonus confirmation screen is added to the sound playback state information described later every time a predetermined period elapses after the instruction related to the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence is given. Marker data is defined. For example, the sound pattern data C constituting the sound effect sequence C related to the effect for displaying the bonus confirmation screen is a sound that outputs a wav file name “effect sound C” for a predetermined time, for example, 5 seconds, with the start lever 16 being operated. It is a pattern. In addition, in the sound effect sequence C, marker data 1 to 4 to be added to sound reproduction state information to be described later are specified every time one second has elapsed after the sub CPU 102 instructs the sound board 71 to output the effect sound C. ing.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired sound effect sequence as sound effect sequence data to be referred to in subsequent processing (S934).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (S935). The sound reproduction state information is information indicating the output state of the production sound (sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71, elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. . The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entry) to the sound reproduction state information in the accessory effect linked request processing (S907) of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). In S935, when neither the operation start request nor the operation end request is included in the sound reproduction state information (when S935 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S937.

  In S935, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound playback state information (when S935 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a sound accessory-linked effect process (S936). In the sound effect linked effect processing, the sub CPU 102 synchronizes the start timing and the end timing of the effect effect by the rotating character 123 by outputting the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R. To give instructions. For example, when the accessory pattern data A having the first stop operation as a start condition is a linked accessory pattern, and an operation start request is entered in the sound playback state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the sound pattern sequence data A set in S934 and the sound pattern data A with the first stop operation as a start condition is linked sound pattern data, the effect sound related to the sound pattern data A is transmitted to the speakers 20L and 20R. Is output to the sound board 71. In addition, when an operation end request related to the accessory pattern data A is entered in the sound reproduction state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 outputs an effect sound related to the sound pattern data A. The sound board 71 is instructed to stop (end). Even if the accessory pattern data A having the first stop operation as a start condition is a linked accessory pattern, and an operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), If the sound effect sequence data B set in S934 is configured, and the sound pattern data B having the first stop operation as a start condition is not linked sound pattern data, the sub CPU 102 issues an instruction related to the sound pattern data B in S936. Without performing this, the process proceeds to S937.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound effect sequence data update process (S937). In this process, it is determined whether the start condition of the sound pattern data constituting the set sound effect sequence data is correct. If it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the sound is output so that the effect sound is output with the pattern of the sound pattern data. Instruct the substrate 71. If the sound pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is the interlocking sound pattern data, and the operation start request has not yet been entered in the sound playback state information, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect related to the sound pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Hold sound output instructions. In this case, at the timing when the process proceeds to S935 and S936 after the operation start request is entered in the sound playback state information, the sub CPU 102 instructs the production sound output related to the suspended sound pattern data. Thereby, it is possible to synchronize the effect related to the interlocking accessory pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned accessory pattern data A, and the effect related to the interlocking sound pattern data, such as the effect related to the above-mentioned sound pattern data A. it can.

  Since the other points of the sound effect sequence data update process are the same as the above-described accessory effect sequence data update process (S905 in FIG. 120), description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs sound reproduction state information update processing (S938). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the sound reproduction state information. If the sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71 in S936 is sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence related to the effect for displaying the bonus confirmation screen, the sub CPU 102 determines the sound every predetermined time. Marker data defined in the production sequence is added to the sound playback state information. For example, when the sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71 is the sound pattern data C constituting the sound effect sequence C described above, the marker data 1 is 1 second after the instruction related to the sound pattern data C is given. The marker data 2 is added to the sound reproduction state information after 2 seconds, the marker data 3 after 3 seconds, and the marker data 4 after 4 seconds. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S931.

[Animation control task]
Next, the animation control task will be described with reference to FIG. The animation control task is a task for controlling display of video by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2).

  In S941 of the animation control task, the sub CPU 102 extracts the animation data registered in S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and moves the process to S942 (S941). If there is no registered animation data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S942.

  In S942, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is registered animation data (S942). When it is determined that there is no animation data registered in S942 (when S942 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S945.

  When it is determined that there is animation data registered in S942 (when S942 is YES), the sub CPU 102 selects an animation effect sequence associated with the extracted animation data from a plurality of animation effect sequences constituting the animation sequence table. Is acquired (S943). The animation effect sequence is data indicating an effect pattern by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 11 (refer to FIG. 2) (data indicating the name of a moving image file to be reproduced, moving image reproduction time, etc., hereinafter referred to as animation pattern data). Are). The animation effect sequence may be composed of a single animation pattern data or a combination of a plurality of animation pattern data. Some animation pattern data constituting an animation effect sequence is set with a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the animation pattern data. As the start condition, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the rotation start of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the press of the stop button in the third stop operation, the so-called third stop operation ON (ON edge), release of pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation OFF (OFF edge, display command reception), payout. In addition, the animation production sequence is, for the animation pattern data constituting the animation production sequence, whether the pattern data is pattern data (hereinafter, linked animation pattern data) related to an animation accessory linked production (see S946) described later. It is comprised including the data which shows. The animation effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of animation effect sequences, and associates animation data with the animation effect sequence.

  The animation effect sequence includes data indicating whether or not the bonus confirmed effect sequence is an animation effect sequence related to the effect for displaying the bonus confirmation screen (moving image). Further, the effect by the animation pattern data constituting the bonus fixed effect sequence is performed by sequentially reproducing (displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11) a plurality of divided moving image data generated by dividing a series of moving image data. . For example, the effect by the animation pattern data A that constitutes the animation effect sequence C that is the bonus confirmed effect sequence is, for example, divided video data 0 to 4 generated by dividing 5 seconds of moving image data into 5 parts per second. It is configured. The subsequent divided moving image data following the first divided moving image data, that is, divided moving image data 1 to 4 following the divided moving image data 0 in the above example, is associated with different marker data described later. The reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 to 4 will be described in detail in the description of S950 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired animation effect sequence as animation effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S944).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information (S945). The animation reproduction state information is information indicating the video display state (animation pattern data related to the instruction to the liquid crystal display device 11 and the elapsed time from the instruction), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. The action start request and action end request are added (entry) to the animation playback state information in the accessory effect linked request processing (S907) of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). In S945, when neither the motion start request nor the motion end request is included in the animation playback state information (when S945 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S947.

  In S945, when there is a motion start request or motion end request in the animation playback state information (when S945 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an animation accessory-linked effect process (S946). In the animation accessory-linked effect process, the sub CPU 102 synchronizes the start timing and end timing of the animation effect by displaying the video on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the accessory effect by the rotating accessory 123. To give instructions. For example, in the case where the accessory pattern data A having the first stop operation as a start condition is an interlocking accessory pattern, and an operation start request is entered in the animation playback state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the animation production sequence data A set in S944 is configured, and the animation pattern data B having the first stop operation as a start condition is linked animation pattern data, the video related to the animation pattern data B is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 11 is instructed. In addition, when an operation end request related to the accessory pattern data A is entered in the animation playback state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 stops displaying the video related to the animation pattern data B. The liquid crystal display device 11 is instructed to (end). In addition, when the accessory pattern data A having the first stop operation as a start condition is a linked accessory pattern, and an operation start request is entered in the animation playback state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the animation pattern data D that constitutes the animation effect sequence data B set in S944 and the first stop operation is the start condition is not linked animation pattern data, the sub CPU 102 performs the animation pattern data D in the process of S946. The processing moves to S947 without giving an instruction relating to the above.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the animation effect sequence data set in S944 is a bonus confirmed effect sequence that is an animation effect sequence related to an effect for displaying a bonus confirmation screen (moving image) (S947). If it is determined in S947 that the sequence is not the bonus confirmed effect sequence (NO in S947), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S951.

  If it is determined in S947 that it is a bonus confirmed effect sequence (S947 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires sound reproduction state information stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S948).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is marker data in the sound reproduction state information (S949). If it is determined that there is no marker data (NO in S949), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S951.

  If it is determined in S949 that there is marker data (YES in S949), the sub CPU 102 performs bonus finalization effect processing (S950). In this process, the sub CPU 102 reproduces any of the subsequent divided moving image data following the first divided moving image data related to the bonus fixed effect sequence (displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Each subsequent divided moving image data is associated with different marker data, and the sub CPU 102 reproduces the subsequent divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data when the marker data is included in the sound reproduction state information acquired in S948. . For example, the divided moving image data 1 reproduced by the animation pattern data A constituting the animation effect sequence C described above is associated with the marker data 1 related to the sound pattern data C constituting the sound effect sequence C described above. Similarly, the divided moving image data 2 is associated with the marker data 2, the divided moving image data 3 is associated with the marker data 3, and the divided moving image data 4 is associated with the marker data 4. If the sound reproduction state information includes the marker data 1, the sub CPU 102 starts reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 when the divided moving image data 1 is not reproduced. In the same case, when the divided moving image data 1 is being reproduced, the reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 is continued. Similarly, when any of the marker data 2 to 4 is included in the sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 starts reproduction of any of the divided moving image data 2 to 4 associated therewith. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a synchronization shift in which the display of the moving image related to the effect displaying the bonus confirmation screen (moving image) and the output of the effect sound are shifted. Note that the display instruction for the first divided moving image data (for example, the divided moving image data 0) is issued in S951 described later, or in S946 if the animation pattern data of the bonus confirmed effect sequence is linked animation pattern data. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an animation effect sequence data update process (S951). In this process, the correctness of the start condition of the animation pattern data constituting the set animation effect sequence data is determined, and when it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the liquid crystal display device displays the moving image related to the animation pattern data 11 is instructed. If the animation pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is the linked animation pattern data, and the operation start request has not yet been entered in the animation playback state information, the sub CPU 102 instructs the animation pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Hold on. In this case, the sub CPU 102 issues an instruction relating to the suspended animation pattern data at a timing when the process proceeds to S945 and S946 after the operation start request is entered in the animation playback state information. Thereby, it is possible to synchronize the effect related to the interlocking accessory pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-described accessory pattern data A, and the effect related to the interlocking animation pattern data, such as the effect related to the above-described animation pattern data B. it can.

  The other points of the animation effect sequence data update process are the same as the above-described accessory effect sequence data update process (S905 in FIG. 120), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an animation reproduction state information update process (S952). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the animation reproduction state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S941.

[Touch panel control task]
Next, the touch panel control task will be described with reference to FIG. The touch panel control task is a task for managing the touch input unit 31 a and is performed by the sub CPU 102.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is received data (S961). Here, the received data is transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 (see FIG. 7) at a predetermined cycle, in this embodiment, every 200 msec, and is received by the sub control board 42 via the sub relay board 67 (FIG. 7). It is data to be. Commands included in the received data include a touch operation command, a flick operation command, a reset notification command, and an operation confirmation command.

  The touch operation command is a command included in received data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when a touch operation is performed. Here, the touch operation is an operation of touching a finger on the surface of the touch input unit 31a. The received data including the touch operation command also includes coordinate information related to the touch operation performed.

  The flick operation command is a command included in received data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when a flick operation is performed. Here, the flick operation is an operation in which the surface of the touch input unit 31a is quickly played with a finger, that is, an operation in which the finger is moved over a predetermined distance in a short time while keeping the finger in contact with the surface. The received data including the flick operation command also includes coordinate information related to the flick operation performed.

  The reset notification command is, for example, when a communication error occurs between the touch sensor relay board 73 and the touch input unit 31a and the touch sensor relay board 73 resets itself and the touch input unit 31a. This is a command included in the received data received from the board 73.

The operation check command is received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when the touch sensor relay board 73 does not receive an input signal from the touch input unit 31a, that is, when no operation is performed on the touch input unit 31a. Command included in the received data.
When a failure occurs in the touch sensor relay board 73 or the touch input unit 31a, the received data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 may include an error code indicating the failure.

  If it is determined in S961 that there is no received data (NO in S961), the sub CPU 102 repeats the process of S961.

  If it is determined in S961 that there is received data (YES in S961), it is determined whether the received data is normal (the received data does not include an error code) (S962). When it is determined in S962 that the received data is not normal (when S962 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an error history registration process (S963). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 records the error code “TP COM ERR” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S961.

  The error code recorded in the predetermined area of the sub-RAM is displayed on the error information history screen (see FIG. 130) displayed on the main screen 111 in the error information history processing (S1009) in the hall menu processing (see FIG. 129) described later. Can be referred to.

  If it is determined in S962 that the received data is normal (YES in S962), the sub CPU 102 performs touch panel input editing processing (S964). In the touch panel input editing process, when the touch operation command or the flick operation command is continuously included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 a predetermined number of times, in this embodiment, 288,000 times, the error history is registered. It is a process to perform. Details of the touch panel input editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the touch panel input editing process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S961.

[Touch panel input editing processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the touch panel input editing process in S964 in the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command included in the received data, that is, the received command (CMD) is an operation confirmation command (S971). If it is determined in S971 that the command is an operation confirmation command (YES in S971), the sub CPU 102 sets the operation command continuous count stored in the sub RAM 103 to 0 (S972). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S982.

  If it is determined in S971 that the command is not an operation confirmation command (S971 is NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a touch operation command (S973).

  If it is determined in S973 that the command is a touch operation command (YES in S973), the sub CPU 102 stores touch operation XY coordinate data, which is coordinate information in the received data, in the touch operation buffer of the sub RAM 103 (S974).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the operation command continuous counter (S975). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S982.

  If it is determined in S973 that the command is not a touch operation command (S973 is NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a flick operation command (S976).

  If it is determined in S976 that the command is a flick operation command (YES in S976), the sub CPU 102 stores the flick operation XY coordinate data, which is coordinate information in the received data, in the touch operation buffer of the sub RAM 103 (S977).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the operation command continuous counter (S978). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S982.

  If it is determined in S976 that the command is not a flick operation command (NO in S976), it is determined whether or not the received command is a reset notification command (S979).

  If it is determined in S979 that the command is not a reset notification command (NO in S979), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S982.

  When it is determined in S979 that the command is a reset notification command (when S979 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an error history registration process (S980). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 records the error code “TP RST ??” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 in the operation command continuous counter (S981). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S982.

  In S982, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation command continuous counter stored in the sub RAM 103 exceeds 72000 (S982). If it is determined that the operation command continuous counter does not exceed 72000 (S982 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the touch panel input editing process.

  If it is determined in S982 that the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 (YES in S982), the sub CPU 102 records the error code “TP LONG ON” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S983). Then, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in S982 that the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 (S982 is YES), the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for 3 minutes.

  The case where the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 is a case where the touch operation command or the flick operation command is continuously included 72,000 times in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73. That is, since the touch sensor relay board 73 transmits data every 200 msec, in the above case, the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 4 hours. A case. However, usually, a touch operation or a flick operation is not performed for 4 hours. Therefore, when the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000, some kind of failure has occurred in the touch sensor relay board 73 or the touch input unit 31a, or a part of the player's body or possession in the touch input unit 31a. It is conceivable that the state where the object is in contact continues. Therefore, as described above, the sub CPU 102 records the error code “TP LONG ON” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S983). Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for 3 minutes.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the warning screen on the main screen 111 and displays the screen displayed before the warning screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 after three minutes have elapsed, thereby enabling the game to be resumed. Further, the sub CPU 102 warns when the condition for setting the operation command continuous counter to 0 is satisfied within 3 minutes after the warning screen is displayed, that is, when the operation confirmation command is received or the reset notification command is received. The display of the screen is stopped, the screen that was displayed before the warning screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the game can be resumed.

[Hall Menu Task]
Next, the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIG. The hall menu task is a task for controlling the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the sub CPU 102 every predetermined cycle, in this embodiment, every 33 msec.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting key has been turned on from off (S991). In this process, when the sub CPU 102 receives a setting change start command transmitted from the main CPU 93 due to the operation of the setting key switch 52, the sub CPU 102 determines that the setting key has been turned on from off.

  In S991, when it is determined that the setting key has not been turned on from OFF (when S991 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S991 again. That is, the sub CPU 102 repeats the process of S991 until it is determined that the setting key has been turned on from off.

  When it is determined in S991 that the setting key has been changed from OFF to ON (when S991 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs hole menu display processing for displaying the hole menu screen shown in FIG. 128 on the main screen 111 (S992). ). As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 102 arranges a hole menu item area for displaying selectable hole menu items on the left side of the hole menu screen. In addition, the sub CPU 102 arranges an operation explanation area for displaying an operation method when displaying the hall menu screen below the hall menu item area.

  In order to check various information / settings and change various settings, the operator operates the select button 29 and the enter button 28 (see FIG. 2) while the hall menu screen is displayed on the main screen 111. Then, one of the hall menus displayed on the hall menu screen is selected. In the operation explanation area, the sub CPU 102 indicates that the highlight display position for designating one hall menu is changed by the select button 29 (menu selection) as an operation explanation. In addition, the sub CPU 102 has an enter button as a target hole menu for checking various information / settings, changing various settings, deleting various information, etc., as the operation description in the operation explanation area. 28 indicates that it is selected (determined).

  In addition, the sub CPU 102 has [Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history] which are hole menus that can be selected on the hall menu screen in the menu item area of the hall menu screen. , [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting], [Notification setting], [Power saving mode], [Maintenance], [Checking the operation of objects], [LCD brightness setting processing], [Volume adjustment setting], 6 Items ([Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting]) are displayed in rectangular buttons. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a button-shaped hole menu displayed in the hole menu item area by selecting [Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], Display them in the vertical direction in the order of [Warning Display Settings].

  Further, the sub CPU 102 highlights [Time Setting] which is the hall menu located at the uppermost position on the hall menu screen at this time. In addition, when the select button 29 is pressed, the sub CPU 102 changes the hall menu to be highlighted from [Time Setting] to [Total Medal Information] positioned below it. Similarly, each time the select button 29 is pressed, the sub CPU 102 changes the hall menu to be highlighted, and at this time, [Warning display setting] which is the hall menu located at the lowest position is highlighted. When the select button 29 is pressed, the rectangular button-shaped hall menu items displayed in the menu item area are displayed as [Notification setting], [Power saving mode], [Maintenance], [Checking the operation of objects], [LCD] Change to 7 items of [Brightness setting processing] and [Volume adjustment setting]. In addition, the sub CPU 102 displays a button-shaped hall menu displayed in the hall menu item area by selecting [notification setting], [power saving mode], “maintenance”, [confirming operation of an accessory], [liquid crystal brightness setting processing], [ Displayed in the vertical direction in the order of [Volume adjustment setting].

  Further, the sub CPU 102 highlights “notification setting”, which is the hall menu located at the uppermost position after the display of the menu item area is changed, and displays the hall menu to be highlighted every time the select button 29 is pressed down. Change to the hall menu located at. The sub CPU 102 displays the menu item area in the menu item area when the select button 29 is pressed while [Volume Adjustment Setting], which is the hall menu located at the lowest position after the display of the menu item area is changed, is highlighted. Change the hall menu items to be displayed to [Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting] (revert to the previous setting) .

  After the hole menu display process of S992 shown in FIG. 127, the sub CPU 102 performs the hole menu process (S993). The hole menu process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting key is turned off (S994). In this process, when the sub CPU 102 receives a setting change end command transmitted from the main CPU 93 due to the operation of the setting key type switch 52, the sub CPU 102 determines that the setting key has been changed from on to off.

  In S994, when it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off from on (when S994 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S993.

  When it is determined in S994 that the setting key has been turned off from on (when S994 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting has been changed in the hall menu process (S993) (S995). .

  When it is determined in S995 that the setting has been changed (YES in S995), the sub CPU 102 performs a setting change initialization process (S996), and moves the process to S997. On the other hand, when it is determined in S995 that the setting has not been changed (NO in S995), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S997.

  In S997, the sub CPU 102 performs a game screen return display process (S997). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 an effect video displayed when playing a game and an initial video displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. Then, after the process of S997, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S991.

[Hall menu processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the hole menu process (S993) in the hole menu task (see FIG. 127) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs hole menu selection processing for selecting a hole menu that is a target for checking various information / settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 29 and the enter button 28 by the operator (S1001). ).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [time setting] (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the selected hole menu is [Time setting] (S1002 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs time setting processing (S1003). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 displays a time setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables confirmation and change of the time set by the operator.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [time setting] (when S1002 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [total medal information] (S1004). . When it is determined that the selected hole menu is [total medal information] (when S1004 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs total medal information processing (S1005). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a total medal information screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 and enables the operator to check the total medal information.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [total medal information] (when S1004 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [setting change / confirmation] ( S1006). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is [setting change / confirmation] (when S1006 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs setting change / confirmation processing (S1007). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a setting change / confirmation screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 to allow the operator to confirm and change the setting.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [change / confirm setting] (when S1006 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [error information history] ( S1008). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is [error information history] (YES in S1008), the sub CPU 102 performs error information history processing (S1009). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays an error information history screen shown in FIG. 130 on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to check or change the error information history.

  As shown in FIG. 130, an error information history table is arranged in the approximate center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date / time column in which the date / time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a cancellation date / time column in which the date / time when the error is canceled is displayed. In the lower left part of the error information history screen, an operation method on the error information history screen is displayed. For example, a cursor (not shown) for designating an arbitrary line on the error information history screen is moved by pressing the select button 29 (“cursor movement”), and the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are simultaneously pressed. The error code displayed on the line designated by the cursor is deleted (“data clear”), and the display of the error information history screen is ended by pressing the enter button 28 (“return”). Is displayed.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [error information history] (when S1008 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [monitoring history] (S1010). . When it is determined that the selected hole menu is [monitoring history] (YES in S1010), the sub CPU 102 performs monitoring history processing (S1011). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 and allows the operator to check the monitoring history.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [monitoring history] (when S1010 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [warning display setting] (S1012). . When it is determined that the selected hole menu is [warning display setting] (when S1012 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a warning display setting process (S1013). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 to allow the operator to check and change the warning display setting.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [warning display setting] (when S1012 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [notification setting] (S1014). . When it is determined that the selected hole menu is [notification setting] (when S1014 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs notification setting processing (S1015). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 to allow the operator to check and change the notification setting.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [notification setting] (when S1014 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [power saving mode] (S1016). . When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [power saving mode] (when S1016 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs power saving mode processing (S1017). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 and allows the operator to confirm and change the setting of the power saving mode.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [power saving mode] (when S1016 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [Maintenance] (S1018). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is [Maintenance] (when S1018 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a maintenance process (S1019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [Maintenance] (when S1018 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [Check the operation of an accessory] (S1020). . When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Checking the operation of an accessory] (when S1020 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an accessory operation check process (S1021). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 displays an accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 to allow the operator to confirm the operation of the accessory.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [Check the operation of an accessory] (when S1020 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [LCD brightness setting] ( S1022). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is [LCD brightness setting] (YES in S1022), the sub CPU 102 performs a liquid crystal brightness setting process (S1023). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a liquid crystal luminance setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to confirm and change the luminance setting of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [LCD brightness setting] (when S1022 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [volume adjustment setting] (S1024). ). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [volume adjustment setting] (when S1024 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a volume adjustment setting process (S1025). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the volume of the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R.

  After determining that the hole menu selected in S1001 after S1003, s1005, S1007, S1009, S1011, S1013, S1015, S1017, S1019, S1021, S1023, and S1025 is not [Volume adjustment setting] (NO in S1024) In this case, the sub CPU 102 ends the hall menu process and returns the process to S994 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 127).

[Maintenance processing]
Next, the maintenance process (S1019) in the hall menu process (see FIG. 129) will be described with reference to FIG. In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 and the touch panel maintenance screen 115 shown in FIG. 132 on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the MAX bet button 14, the 1 bet button 15, the stop buttons 17L, 17C and 17R, and the enter button 28. , Various operation devices such as the select button 29 that are operated by the player, various internal devices arranged inside the pachislot 1 such as the hopper device 43 and the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and various sensors such as a sensor provided in the selector 46 The operator can confirm whether or not various peripheral devices such as the sensor and the touch input unit 31a operate normally. In the following description, various peripheral devices other than various operation devices, various internal devices, various sensors, and the touch input unit 31a may be collectively referred to as various devices.

  As shown in FIG. 132, the sub CPU 102 displays a maintenance screen 114 above the partition piece 112 on the main screen 111. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays operation states of various devices on the maintenance screen 114. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the touch panel maintenance screen 115 across the lower side of the partition piece on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 displays an operation state display table shown in FIG. 133 in the approximate center of the maintenance screen 114. The operation state display table includes a name string in which names of 23 various devices are displayed, a number string in which serial numbers (1 to 23) assigned to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed, And an operation state column indicating operation states of various devices. The “OFF” display in the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is an input from various devices, the display of the operation state column is changed from “OFF” display to “ON” display. For example, when the MAX bet button 14 is pressed while the maintenance screen 114 is displayed, the sub CPU 102 changes the display of the operation state column of the MAX bet button 14 from “OFF” display to “ON” display. The “ON” display is displayed in red.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 displays an operation method when displaying the maintenance screen 114 at the lower left of the maintenance screen 114. Specifically, it is displayed that if the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed simultaneously, the display returns to the hall menu screen (FIG. 128) (redisplayed).

  As shown in FIG. 132, the sub CPU 102 displays a cross-shaped grid line G composed of a vertical line and a horizontal line orthogonal to the vertical line on the touch panel maintenance screen 115. When the display of the touch panel maintenance screen 115 is started, the sub CPU 102 determines that the grid line G is an intersection of the vertical and horizontal lines constituting the grid line G (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an intersection of the grid lines G). It is displayed so as to be arranged at the initial position set at the upper right of. When a finger touches the touch input unit 31a, as shown in FIG. 134, the sub CPU 102 arranges the display position of the grid line G and the intersection of the grid line G at the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a. Change to That is, the sub CPU 102 changes the display position of the grid line G so that the intersection of the grid lines G is arranged at a position corresponding to the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a on the sub screen 113. Further, when the finger moves while maintaining a state in which the finger touches the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 is arranged at a position corresponding to a position where the finger of the grid line G is always touching the touch input unit 31a. As described above, the display position of the grid line G is changed in synchronization with the movement of the finger.

  Further, when the finger is released from the touch input unit 31a after changing the display position of the grid line G, the sub CPU 102 changes the display position of the grid line G so that the intersection of the grid lines G is arranged at the initial position described above. change.

  In the maintenance process (see FIG. 131), first, the sub CPU 102 acquires non-operation command data from the main CPU 93 (S1031). The no-operation command here is a main input indicating whether it is an on state in which there is an input or an off state in which there is no input from various devices assigned serial numbers 1 to 18 in the operation state display table shown in FIG. The status information is included and transmitted from the main CPU 93 every 4 msec.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a main input state information editing process for reading main input state information in the acquired no-operation command data (S1032).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires sub device input information (S1033). The sub-device input information is information transmitted at predetermined intervals from the various devices to which the serial numbers 19 to 23 in the operation state display table shown in FIG. 133 are attached and the touch input unit 31a. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state where there is an input or in an off state where there is no input. Further, the sub input state information in the sub device input information transmitted from the touch input unit 31a includes a position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a (XY coordinates when the initial position is 0, 0). It is.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub input state information editing process for reading out the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (S1034).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 (see FIGS. 132 and 133) above the partition piece 112 on the main screen 111 based on the main input state information read in S1032 and the sub input state information read in S1034. A maintenance screen display process to be displayed is performed (S1035). In this process, the maintenance screen 114 is displayed and the display is updated (for example, change from “OFF” display to “ON” display).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs touch panel maintenance screen display processing for displaying the touch panel maintenance screen 115 on the sub screen 113 based on the sub input information read in S1034 (S1036). In this process, display and update of the touch panel maintenance screen 115 (for example, change of the display position of the grid line G) is performed.

  Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are operated simultaneously (S1037). When it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 have been operated simultaneously (when S1037 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see the figure), and performs the hall menu task (see FIG. 127).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are not operated at the same time (when S1037 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S1031.

[Execution of OFF edge when touch input button is selected]
In the present embodiment, when the operator selects an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 using the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 executes OFF edge execution. The OFF edge execution means that the sub CPU 102 detects selection of an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the finger is released from the touch input unit 31a. In the present embodiment, detecting the selection of an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the sub CPU 102 touches the touch input unit 31a is referred to as ON edge execution.
Hereinafter, the portable terminal cooperation function of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 135 to 141.

  The portable terminal cooperation function of the pachi-slot 1 is a function that links the pachi-slot 1 and the portable terminal. When using the mobile terminal linkage function of the pachislot 1, it is possible to record detailed information about the game played by the player, or to customize the function that does not affect the game result of the pachislot 1 by satisfying a predetermined condition Can do.

  As the predetermined condition, for example, a specific small combination (internal winning combination) is continuously determined, or a specific effect is executed. In addition, for example, to customize a function that does not affect the game result of the pachislot 1, for example, music output during the first ART (pseudo bonus) or the second ART (ART) can be changed to a special song. For example, the character costume may be changed or the character costume displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 may be changed.

  When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, a guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. When a pressing operation is performed on the enter button 28 or the select button 29 in a state where the unit game is finished, a guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.

FIG. 135 shows a state where the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The guide initial image includes characters “Unimemo (registered trademark)” and characters “Please select your favorite menu”.

  As shown in FIG. 135, when a guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, a guide menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. A plurality of guide menus are displayed on the guide menu screen. The items in the guide menu include “Start Unimemo”, “Arrangement / Payout”, “Model Site”, and “Return to Game”. Each guide menu is displayed in the shape of a rectangular button with a character string of the item name in the center.

  When “Start Unimemo” is selected from the guide menu, an initial Unimemo image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 138). When “array / payout” is selected, an array / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (not shown). When “model site” is selected, a model site registration code is displayed on the main screen 111.

  When “return to game” is selected, the display of the guide initial image on the main screen 111 and the display of the guide menu on the sub screen 113 are ended. The main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 display an effect video displayed when playing a game and an initial video displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. In addition, even when a predetermined time has elapsed without touching any of the items in the guide menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 have a predetermined video for presentation and pachislot 1 displayed when playing a game. An initial image to be displayed when no operation is performed for a period is displayed.

  When the guide menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 executes OFF edge detection to detect that each guide menu has been selected by the player when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a leaves the touch input unit 31a. . Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the guide menu displayed at the position on the sub screen 113 corresponding to the position touched by the player's finger on the touch input unit 31a so as to be distinguishable from other guide menu buttons. . In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 performs highlight display in which a target guide menu button is displayed in a distinguishable manner from other guide menu buttons. Instead of the highlight display, the target guide menu button may be enlarged and displayed so as to be distinguishable from other guide menu buttons.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 136, the player selects a position corresponding to the position where the “arrangement / payout” of the guide menu on the sub screen 113 is displayed on the touch input unit 31 a (in this embodiment, the guide menu “arrangement”). When the user touches a finger at a position facing the “payout” in the front-rear direction, the sub CPU 102 highlights and displays the “arrangement / payout” in the guide menu, that is, the “arrangement / payout” in the guide menu. In this state, when the player releases his / her finger from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 detects that “arrangement / payout” in the guide menu is selected by the player.

The position corresponding to the position where the “arrangement / payout” of the guide menu is displayed without releasing the finger from the touch input unit 31a while the “arrangement / payout” of the guide menu is highlighted. When the finger is moved outside, the sub CPU 102 ends the “array / payout” highlight display of the guide menu. In this case, the sub CPU 102 does not detect that “arrangement / payout” of the guide menu has been selected by the player. Then, as shown in FIG. 137, when the player moves his / her finger to a position corresponding to the position where “Start Unimemo” is displayed in the guide menu, the sub CPU 102 selects “Start Unimemo” in the guide menu. Is highlighted. In this state, when the player releases his / her finger from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 detects that “Start Unimemo” in the guide menu is selected by the player.
That is, unless the player removes his / her finger from the touch input unit 31a, the sub screen 113 is displayed at a position corresponding to the position outside the first touch input unit 31a (facing in the front-rear direction in this embodiment). You can select the guide menu that is being used.

  A specific operation of the sub CPU 102 when the above-described guide menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113 will be described. First, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player has touched the touch input unit 31a and the position coordinates of the position where the player's finger is touched (the above-described operation XY coordinate data). Next, the sub CPU 102 displays a guide menu at a position on the sub screen 113 corresponding to the detected position coordinate (in this embodiment, a position facing the position where the player's finger is touched in the front-rear direction). If so, highlight the button in that guide menu. Further, the sub CPU 102 acquires the position coordinates of the position where the player's finger is touched every predetermined cycle, in this embodiment, every 50 msec. When the sub CPU 102 detects that the player's finger has moved away from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 determines the position coordinate acquired last as the selection coordinate, and guides the menu to the position corresponding to the selection coordinate on the sub screen 113. Is displayed, it is detected that the guide menu has been selected by the player.

FIG. 138 shows a state where the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The unimemo initial image includes characters “Unimemo” and characters “Let's customize a favorite character”.

  As shown in FIG. 138, when the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the unimemo menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. A plurality of uni-memo menus are displayed on the uni-memo menu screen. The items of the uni-memo menu include “password entry”, “record”, “record and exit”, “member registration”, “return to game”, and “return”. Each Unimemo menu is displayed as a rectangular button with a character string of the item name in the center. At the time of displaying the unimemo menu screen, the sub CPU 102 confirms that each unimemo menu has been selected by the player, as described above, when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a leaves the touch input unit 31a. To detect.

  When “password input” is selected, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 139).

FIG. 139 shows a state in which a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The password display image includes the characters “Please enter your password”.

  As shown in FIG. 139, when a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, a password input menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. A plurality of password input menus are displayed on the password input menu screen. The items of the password input menu include “OK”, “Delete”, “0” to “9”, “A” to “F”, “Return to game”, and “Return”. Each password input menu is displayed as a rectangular button with a character string of the item name in the center.

  When “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” in the password input menu are selected, the selected characters are input and displayed on the password display image. When “OK” in the password input menu is selected, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as input passwords. When “Delete” is selected from the password input menu, the last input character is deleted from the password display image.

  When “Return to game” is selected from the password input menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 are displayed when the game is played and the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. The initial video to be displayed is displayed. In addition, even when a predetermined time has passed without any of the password input menu items being selected, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 113 have a video for presentation displayed when a game is played and a pachislot 1 is predetermined. An initial image to be displayed when no operation is performed for a period is displayed. When “Return” is selected from the password input menu, the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and the unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 113 (see FIG. 138).

  When the password input menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 detects that each password menu has been selected by the player when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a leaves the touch input unit 31a, as described above. To do. For example, as shown in FIG. 139, when the player touches the position corresponding to the position where “E” in the password input menu is displayed (opposite in the front-rear direction) on the touch input unit 31a, The CPU 102 highlights “E” in the password input menu. Then, as shown in FIG. 140, when the player moves his / her finger to a position corresponding to the position where “F” in the password input menu is displayed on the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 inputs the password. The highlighting of “E” in the menu is terminated, and “F” in the password input menu is highlighted. In this case, the sub CPU 102 does not detect that “E” in the password input menu is selected by the player. When the player releases his / her finger from the touch input unit 31a while “F” in the password input menu is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 selects “F” in the password input menu by the player. Detect that. Then, as shown in FIG. 141, the sub CPU 102 displays “F” related to selection detection on the password display image.

[Other examples of touch panel layout]
In the present embodiment described above, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 is divided into the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113, and touch input using the touch sensor module 31 is performed so that a touch operation can be performed on the sub screen 113. Although the example which arrange | positions the part (touch panel) 31a is demonstrated, about arrangement | positioning of the touch input part (touch panel) 31a, it is not restricted to this. For example, the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a may be arranged in an area corresponding to the main screen 111 so that the touch operation can be performed not only on the sub screen 113 but also on the main screen 111. In this case, since various input operations can be performed in a wider area than on the sub screen 113, the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a may not be disposed in the area corresponding to the sub screen 113. That is, the liquid crystal display device 11 may be configured such that a touch operation can be input over the entire area where a normal effect or the like is displayed.

  Hereinafter, an example in which the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a using the touch sensor module 31 is arranged in an area corresponding to the main screen 111 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  142 and 143 are diagrams showing a password display image (password input area 116) and a password input menu screen (keyboard display area 117) displayed on the main screen 111 in this example, and FIG. FIG. 143 shows a state where a part of the password is not inputted.

  As shown in FIG. 142, characters entered as a password are displayed on the main screen 111 (the liquid crystal display device 11), and a password input area 116 capable of touch operation and a password input area are entered. A keyboard display area 117 in which various characters and symbols can be specified by a touch operation, and a will operation input area 118 in which various intention operations of the player can be input are displayed.

  The password input area 116 can input 12 characters and symbols, and the number of characters (digits) of the password that can be input is constant regardless of the amount of information. In the password input area 116, passwords can be input sequentially from the left side to the right side, and an underline (bar) is displayed at each position where the password is input. In the following description, the leftmost input location in the password input area 116 is PA1, the right input location is PA2, the right input location is PA3,... And the rightmost input location is PA12. That is, the first character of the password is input to PA1, the second character of the password is input to PA2, the third character of the password is input to PA3, and the twelfth character of the password is input to PA12. .

  Note that the number of characters (number of digits) of the password that can be entered in the password input area 116 may be variable depending on the amount of information, the date and time of acquisition, and the like. Further, the characters and symbols used in the password are not limited to those shown in FIG. Alphanumeric characters and symbolic symbols indicating characters can be used.

  The keyboard display area 117 can display 32 characters and symbols. When the player touches an area corresponding to these characters and symbols, the characters and symbols input to the password input area 116 are displayed. It can be specified sequentially. Although not shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, when any character or symbol is specified in the keyboard display area 117, a ring (or an arrow is displayed at the corresponding position of the specified character or symbol. Or a rectangular frame similar to the one displayed in the password input area 116) is displayed, so that it is possible to recognize which character or symbol has been designated. ing. However, it may be possible to recognize which character or symbol is designated by changing the display mode of the corresponding portion of the designated character or symbol.

  The cursor is displayed on, for example, the main screen 111 or the sub screen 113, and an operation on a movement selection operation button (not shown) for accepting a movement selection operation such as a cross key or a select button 29. In accordance with the operation, the areas PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116, the areas corresponding to the characters and symbols in the keyboard display area 117, and the input areas in the intention operation input area 118 are sequentially moved one by one. To do. Here, in the password input area 116, when the cursor is moved, the moved position becomes active. Further, in the keyboard display area 117 and the intention operation input area 118, the cursor is positioned on the various areas (buttons) that have been moved, for example, displayed on the main screen 111 or the sub-screen 113 and determined. When an operation on a decision button (not shown) for accepting an operation or an operation on the enter button 28 is performed, corresponding characters and symbols are input to the password display area 116, and various intention operations described later are performed. Done. In other words, in this example, each area in the password input area 116 can be activated without using a touch operation, and characters and symbols in the keyboard display area 117 can be designated and input. A button in the input area 118 can be designated and determined.

  However, in such an operation with the movement selection operation button or the select button 29, the cursor basically moves one by one sequentially, so that, for example, the character “A” in the keyboard display area 117 is displayed. In the state where the cursor is positioned on the corresponding area, if it is desired to specify an area corresponding to the character “H” in the keyboard display area 117, it is necessary to execute the horizontal operation seven times. For example, when the cursor is positioned on the area corresponding to the character “A” in the keyboard display area 117 and the user wishes to specify the area in the password input area 116, the vertical operation is executed once. However, in this case, it moves uniformly to the place where the next character or symbol is input in the non-input area (that is, the first place). In addition, for example, in a state where the cursor is positioned in any area in the password input area 116, if it is desired to specify an area in the keyboard display area 117, the user can move by executing a vertical operation once. In this case, however, the area is uniformly moved to the area corresponding to the character “A” in the keyboard display area 117. These are examples of regularity regarding the movement of the cursor when the touch operation is not used.

  The intention operation input area 118 is a cancel operation input area in which a cancel operation for returning the executed operation to the previous state (for example, returning the display to the screen before the password input screen) can be input (FIGS. 142 and 143, “return” display location) and a deletion operation input area in which a deletion operation for deleting one character of the input password can be input (in FIG. 142 and FIG. 143, “single character deletion” display location) And a determination operation input area (a display location of “decision” in FIGS. 142 and 143) in which a determination operation for confirming the executed operation (for example, confirming the input password) can be input.

  Here, the determination operation input area is determined when any character or symbol is not input in all of PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116 (that is, when a part of the password is not input). The operation is not ready for input (refer to the display of “decision” in which the display of FIG. 142 is reversed in black and white in FIG. 143), and any character in all of PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116 Or when a symbol is entered (that is, when all passwords are entered), the enter operation can be entered (refer to the display of “decide” in FIG. 142). .

  As a result, for example, when a player forgets one character to be input, the player can immediately recognize that there is an error in the input contents of the password. Thus, it is possible to prevent unnecessary time from being consumed and to improve the convenience related to password input.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the deletion operation input area is an area in which any character or symbol has already been input in PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116 (input completed area). The deletion operation can be input only when the last region (that is, the rightmost region) is selected, and the deletion operation cannot be input in other cases. .

  Although not shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, when characters are input in any of PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116, a certain period of time (for example, 40 seconds), the player does not Even if a demonstration screen (standby screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 because no operation is performed, the input content is retained at least until the next game start operation is performed. It has become. Further, even when the guide menu screen returns to the previous state due to the release operation performed on the release operation input area described above, at least until the start operation of the next game is performed. The input contents are held. That is, even when the display of the password display image is interrupted, the input contents are held until the next game is started.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, when a character is input in any of PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116, a liquid crystal display is displayed by operating a settlement button (not shown). Even when a demonstration screen (standby screen) is immediately displayed on the device 11, the input content is held at least until the next game start operation is performed. That is, even when the display of the password display image is forcibly terminated, the input contents are held until the next game is started.

  142 and 143 exemplify the password input area 116 in which a password is input as an area (character input area) in which a character is input. However, characters input in the character input area are described. The columns are not limited to passwords related to production. For example, it may be a character input area (character input area 116) displayed when inputting various information in the hall menu described above (for example, a store name of a game store entered by a store clerk of a game store). At this time, similarly, the keyboard display area 117 and the intention operation input area 118 are displayed, and the same control as the various display controls described above or in the password input area 116 described later is performed. Good. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to all forms in which a character string related to predetermined information can be input to a gaming machine.

  144 and 145 are enlarged views of the password display image (password input area 116) displayed on the main screen 111 in this example, and are diagrams for explaining the transition of the display mode.

  First, with reference to FIG. 144, transition of the display mode when the player sequentially inputs passwords in the password input area 116 will be described. In FIG. 144, “A” is input to PA1 of password input area 116, “B” to PA2, “C” to PA3, “D” to PA4, “E” to PA5, and “F” to PA6. PA7 to PA12 show a state in which no characters or symbols are input. In the present embodiment, in the password input area 116, an area where a password has already been input (that is, PA1 to PA6) will be described as an input area, and an area where a password has not yet been input (that is, PA7 to PA12) will be described. It may be described as a non-input area.

  Here, the display of the underline (bar) where the next character or symbol is input in the non-input area (that is, the top part) is different from the display of the underline (bar) of the other part. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 144, the underline (bar) display at the head of the non-input area is a white display, and the underline (bar) of the input area and the non-input area other than the head is displayed. The display is black. Note that this is an example, and the underline (bar) display at the head of the non-input area is turned on (or flashes), and the underline (bar) of the input and non-input areas other than the head is displayed. The display can be turned off (or only turned on for flashing). In other words, by making the display mode of the head position in the non-input area different from the display mode of the input area and the non-input area other than the head, it is easy to recognize the head position in the non-input area. All aspects can be employed.

  In the upper part of FIG. 144, for example, a state immediately after the character “F” is input to PA6 of the password input area 116 is shown. In this case, the player last touched (or the above-described operation). The cursor is moved to the area corresponding to “F” in the keyboard display area 117, so that the cursor is moved to the area corresponding to “F” in the keyboard display area 117. That is, in the upper part of FIG. 144, although the display mode described above indicates that PA7 in password input area 116 is the leading position in the non-input area, PA7 in password input area 116 immediately becomes a character or This indicates that the symbol is not in a state where it can be input (that is, an active state).

  However, as will be described later, as long as characters and symbols are sequentially input in the password input area 116 without changing the characters and symbols in the input area, Alternatively, control may be performed so that the leading position in the non-input area becomes active.

  In contrast to the upper part of FIG. 144, the lower part of FIG. 144 shows that PA7 in the password input area 116 is the leading position in the non-input area and is in an active state. At this time, in PA7 of the password input area 116, a white underline (bar) is displayed and a white frame is displayed. In other words, when characters and symbols can be input at the head of the non-input area, not only the head of the non-input area is shown, but also the display mode is changed to display characters and symbols. Is in a state where it is possible to input. In this case as well, various modes can be adopted as the display mode indicating the state in which characters and symbols can be input.

  That is, in this example, the display area is changed depending on whether or not a character or a symbol can be input immediately while showing the leading area in the non-input area. Thereby, it is possible to devise a way to display the password input state in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and it is possible to improve convenience related to password input.

  In this example, in order to enter a state where characters and symbols can be input (that is, an active state) at the head of the non-input area of the password input area 116, the non-input area in the password input area 116 It is only necessary to perform a touch operation on any of these areas. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when PA1 to PA6 in the password input area 116 are input areas, and PA7 to PA12 in the password input area 116 are non-input areas, In order to set the leading PA 7 in an active state (that is, an effective state), not only PA 7 but also any area of PA 8 to PA 12 can be touched so that PA 7 can input characters and symbols. To be controlled.

  Therefore, when a player tries to input a password in the middle of input, the player has to bother to move the cursor to the top position in the non-input area or to strictly touch the head position in the non-input area. The input can be resumed as soon as the non-input area is touched without performing the operation.

  Thereby, it is possible to make a device that makes it difficult for the player to feel annoyed regarding the input of the password, and it is possible to improve the convenience related to the password input.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, transition of the display mode when the player performs an operation of changing characters and symbols in the input area in the password input area 116 will be described.

  In this example, when it is desired to change the character or symbol in the input area of the password input area 116, the corresponding area is displayed by performing a touch operation on the corresponding area of the password input area 116 in which the character or symbol to be changed is input. After the designation, characters and symbols input to the corresponding area may be designated by touching the keyboard display area 117. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145, when the character “C” input to PA3 in the password input area 116 is to be changed, if a region corresponding to PA3 in the input area is touched, a new character is displayed in PA3. It is controlled to be able to input and symbols. On the other hand, when a character is changed by moving the cursor by the above-described operation, an operation in each direction is necessary for moving the cursor to the corresponding area.

  The underline (bar) display and frame line display are basically the same as those shown in FIG. 144, and the corresponding area of the password input area 116 in which the characters and symbols to be changed are input (example in FIG. 145). Then, when PA3) is touched, the change location is indicated by a white underline (bar) display, and it is indicated that characters and symbols can be input by a white frame display. Of course, the white underline (bar) display indicating the input location is not necessarily moved from the location of PA7 in the password input area 116, but the location of PA3 in the non-input area, indicating the beginning location. Only a blank frame display may be displayed.

  In this way, if the player wants to change the character or symbol of the entered password, he / she can input it immediately by touching the place where the character or symbol to be changed is displayed and re-entering the character or symbol. The contents can be changed.

  As a result, for example, when there is a need to change the input content, such as when there is an error in the input content of the password, it is possible to make a device that makes it difficult for the player to feel annoyed. Convenience can be improved.

<Other specification examples of the pachislot of this embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 155, another specification example of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol arrangement table in the other specification example, FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol combination table in the other specification example, and FIG. 148 is another specification example. FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating an example of an RT transition table in the other specification example, and FIG. 150 is an example of an internal lottery table in the other specification example. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example of a bonus internal winning combination determination table in the other specification example, and FIG. 152 is a small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table in the other specification example. It is a figure which shows an example. 153 to 155 will be described later.

  In the present embodiment described so far, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. If this is done, a function is controlled to shift to a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal, or the gaming state is maintained, and a gaming medium is easily given in the gaming state (that is, the ART function) ), And a game machine to which the specification that allows the player to increase the game media is applied mainly for the operation of the ART function. Among the inventions according to the present embodiment, the invention not related to the ART function is The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that does not have an ART function.

  Therefore, hereinafter, as a specification applicable to the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a gaming machine to which a specification that does not have an ART function and that allows a player to increase the game medium mainly by operating a bonus will be described. . In the following, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the pachislot 1 having the ART function described so far is described as “pachislot 1a”, and the pachislot 1 without the ART function to be described below is described as “pachislot 1b”. .

[Major differences of pachislot machines related to other specification examples]
First, according to the specification related to the pachislot la, a line (center line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R (a center line) that can be validated (valid line) However, in the specification relating to the pachislot 1b, when the number of inserted sheets is 3, a line (center) that connects the middle area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle area of the right reel 3R Line), the upper area of the left reel 3L, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R (top line), the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the right A line connecting the lower area of the reel 3R (bottom line), an upper area of the left reel 3L, a middle area of the middle reel 3C, and a line connecting the lower area of the right reel 3R Cross-down line), as well as the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the center reel 3C, and defines the line connecting the upper region of the right reel 3R (cross up line) as the active line.

  In the specification relating to the pachislot 1b, when the number of inserted sheets is 1 or 2, a line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R, A line (top line) connecting the upper area of the left reel 3L, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R, the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R A line connecting the lower area (bottom line), an upper area of the left reel 3L, an intermediate area of the middle reel 3C, a line connecting the upper area of the right reel 3R (small V line), and a lower area of the left reel 3L, A line (small mountain line) connecting the middle area of the middle reel 3C and the lower area of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line.

  In the specification relating to the pachislot 1a, the number of games that can be started (see FIG. 79) is set to “3” throughout the entire gaming state, but in the specification relating to the pachislot 1b, the RT0 to RT5 gaming state (described later) The game start possible number in the normal game state) is set to “3”, the game start possible number in the BB game state (RB game state) described later is set to “1”, and the MB game state (CB game described later). The number of games that can be started in (status) is set to “2”.

  Further, in the specification relating to the pachislot la, each symbol shown in FIG. 11 is arranged on each reel as shown in FIG. 11, but in the specification relating to the pachislot 1b, each symbol shown in FIG. As shown at 146, each reel is arranged.

  In addition, in the specification related to the pachislot machine 1a, the combination of symbols (display combination) shown in FIGS. 12 to 15 is defined. In the specification related to the pachislot machine 1b, the combination of symbols shown in FIG. ) Is prescribed.

  As shown in FIG. 147, in the specification related to the pachislot 1b, when the number of inserted medals is 3, and “C_Red 7_01” is determined (established) as the display combination, the operation of BB1 is performed and the display combination is displayed. When “C_Blue 7_01” is determined (established), the operation of BB2 is performed. When “C_Yellow 7_01” is determined (established) as the display combination, the operation of BB3 is performed, and “C_Red 7_02” is displayed as the display combination. ”Is determined (established), the operation of BB4 is performed. When“ C_Blue 7_02 ”is determined (established) as the display combination, the operation of BB5 is performed, and“ C_yellow 7_02 ”is determined as the display combination. If it is established (established), the operation of BB6 is performed, and a transition to the BB gaming state described later is made.

  When the number of inserted medals is 3, and “C_red RB” is determined (established) as the display combination, MB1 is activated, and “C_blue RB” is determined (established). ), The operation of MB2 is performed, and when “C_yellow RB” is determined (established) as the display combination, the operation of MB3 is performed and the MB gaming state described later is started.

  Further, when the number of inserted medals is 3, and “C_Replay_01” is determined (established) as the display combination, the re-game is activated, and if it is in the RT0 gaming state, the state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. To do.

  In addition, when the number of inserted medals is 3, and any one of “C_Replay_02” to “C_Replay_05” is determined (established) as the display combination, the re-game is activated and the RT0 gaming state is set. If so, the state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  Further, when “C_Watermelon_01” is determined (established) as the display combination, if the number of inserted medals is 3, 5 medals are paid out, and the number of inserted medals is 2. For example, 15 medals are paid out. If the number of inserted medals is 1, 14 medals are paid out.

  Further, when “C_Bell — 01” is determined (established) as the display combination, if the number of inserted medals is 3, six medals are paid out and the number of inserted medals is two. For example, 15 medals are paid out. If the number of inserted medals is 1, 14 medals are paid out. In the case of the RT0 gaming state, the state shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

  When either “C_special_01” or “C_special_02” is determined (established) as the display combination, if one medal is inserted, one medal is paid out. If the number of inserted medals is 2, 14 medals are paid out, and if the number of inserted medals is 1, 13 medals are paid out.

  Further, when “C_Cherry” is determined (established) as the display combination, if the number of inserted medals is 3, two medals are paid out (in the case of being established on a plurality of active lines, the validity thereof) If the number of medals multiplied by the number of lines is paid out and the number of inserted medals is 2, 15 medals are paid out (in the MB gaming state, 15 are paid out regardless of the number of valid lines established). If the number of inserted medals is one, 14 medals are paid out (in the BB gaming state, 14 is the upper limit number of payouts regardless of the number of valid lines established). ) Is performed.

  Also, in the specification relating to the pachislot la, as shown in FIG. 16, as a bonus game state (special game state) advantageous to the player, the CB game state (type 2 special bonus) is continuously operated. Since only the state (the continuous action device related to the second special accessory) is provided, and the MB gaming state related to the pachislot la is finished with payout exceeding 13 (the value of the bonus end number counter). There are few medals increasing in the bonus game state. On the other hand, in the specification relating to the pachislot 1b, as shown in FIG. 148, the BB gaming state (the continuous action device relating to the first special accessory) in which the RB gaming state (first type special accessory) is continuously operated is In addition to the above, there is provided an MB gaming state in which the CB gaming state (type 2 special bonus) continuously operates (an accessory continuous actuating device relating to the second special bonus), and a BB gaming status relating to the pachislot 1b. Ends with a payout exceeding 321 (the value of the bonus end number counter), and the MB gaming state related to the pachislot 1b ends with a payout exceeding 104 (the value of the bonus end number counter). Many medals are increasing.

  Also, in the BB gaming state, the RB gaming state is controlled from the start to the end, but the RB gaming state has been won eight times (the value of the number of winning possible counters) or eight times ( The end / start is repeated periodically based on the game (value of the possible game counter).

  The control for starting and ending the BB gaming state is basically the same as that in the MB gaming state. For example, in the bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 98, it is determined that one of BB1 to BB6 has won a prize. When this is done, the value of the above-mentioned bonus end number counter is set, the RB gaming state is set, and “8” is set to the values of the possible game number counter and the possible winning number counter. Thereafter, in the bonus end check process shown in FIG. 97, the BB gaming state and the RB gaming state continue until the bonus end number counter value becomes a negative value, and the bonus end number counter value is a negative value. Then it ends.

  Further, in the specification relating to the pachislot la, there are RT0 to RT4 gaming states, and the transition control of each RT gaming state is performed according to the transition conditions shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the specification relating to the pachislot 1b has RT0 to RT5 gaming states, and the transition control of each RT gaming state is performed according to the transition conditions shown in FIG.

  In the specification relating to the pachislot 1b, when the combination of symbols “C_Replay_01” is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state is a low RT gaming state that continues for three games (that is, an RT gaming state with a relatively low winning probability of replay). Transition to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the specification related to the pachislot 1b, when the combination of symbols “C_Bell_01” is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the gaming machine shifts to the RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state is a low RT gaming state that continues for one game, and when one game is consumed, the RT2 gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the specification related to the pachislot 1b, when any combination of symbols “C_Replay_02” to “C_Replay_05” is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the game shifts to the RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state is a high RT gaming state that continues during the game of 12 games (that is, an RT gaming state with a relatively high replay winning probability). Transition to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the specification relating to the pachislot 1b, in the RT1 to RT3 gaming state, the combination of any of the symbols “C_Replay_01”, “C_Bell_01” and “C_Replay_02” to “C_Replay_05” described above is displayed. When the game is performed, the RT gaming state is not newly changed, and the number of continuing games in the current RT gaming state is not newly set (that is, the RT gaming state is not overwritten).

  Further, in the specification related to the pachislot 1b, when any of “F_BB1”, “F_BB5”, and “F_MB3” is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, the state shifts to the RT4 gaming state. The RT4 gaming state is a medium RT gaming state that continues until the bonus combination determined as an internal winning combination wins (that is, until the transition to the bonus gaming state) (that is, the replay winning probability is higher than the low RT gaming state). It is an RT game state that is higher and lower than the high RT game state), and ends when the game proceeds to the bonus game state. Here, since “F_BB1”, “F_BB5”, and “F_MB3” are carryover combinations stored in the carryover combination storage area as bonus combinations, the RT4 gaming state is a carryover section of bonus combinations (between bonus flags). It is also one of the RT gaming states. In addition, after the bonus game state is ended, the state shifts to the RT0 game state.

  In the specification related to the pachislot 1b, if any of “F_BB2” to “F_BB4”, “F_BB6”, “F_MB1” and “F_MB2” is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, the RT5 gaming Transition to the state. The RT5 gaming state is a high RT gaming state that continues until the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination wins (that is, until the transition to the bonus gaming state), and ends when the transition to the bonus gaming state occurs. Here, since “F_BB2” to “F_BB4”, “F_BB6”, “F_MB1”, and “F_MB2” are carryover combinations stored in the carryover combination storage area as bonus combinations, the RT5 gaming state is a bonus combination. It is also one of the RT gaming states as a carryover section (between bonus flags). In addition, after the bonus game state is ended, the state shifts to the RT0 game state.

  Here, the RT4 gaming state related to the pachislot 1b and the RT5 gaming state related to the pachislot 1b are both RT gaming states as bonus flags, but the replay winning probability is different (see FIG. 150 described later). Therefore, the player can guess to some extent the type of bonus combination that is won based on the winning probability of the replay.

  Further, in the specification related to the pachislot 1b, when the set value (settings 1 to 6) is changed in the initialization process at the time of power-on (see FIG. 78), or is normally restored in the return process at the time of power-on. When the entire area of the main RAM 95 is initialized (that is, when the initialization condition is satisfied), the state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In addition, as described above, even after the bonus game state ends, the game shifts to the RT0 game state. In that sense, it can be said that the RT0 gaming state is the initial gaming state.

  Further, in the specification relating to the pachislot la, the internal winning combination (a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed is shown in FIGS. 24 to 28 and corresponds to the values of the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer. For each gaming state, the success / failure is determined with the winning probability shown in FIGS. 19 to 23. However, in the specification relating to the pachislot 1b, FIG. 151 and FIG. With respect to the internal winning combination shown, whether or not the winning is determined with the winning probability shown in FIG. 150 for each gaming state.

  In FIG. 150, each “gaming state” column indicates a lottery value for each gaming state, and each “gaming state” column indicates an internal lottery table for each gaming state. That is, the column “RT0” in FIG. 150 is an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (corresponding to the general gaming state in the pachislot la), and the columns “RT1” to “RT5” in FIG. 150 is an internal lottery table for the RB gaming state (the BB gaming state in which it operates), and the column “CB” in FIG. 150 is the CB gaming state. It is an internal lottery table for (MB game state which operates). However, in the CB gaming state, like the pachislot la, the dedicated internal lottery table is not defined (that is, the internal winning combination is not determined by lottery), and all the defined small combination bits are turned on (that is, , A process of permitting display for all combinations of symbols of small roles) may be performed.

  FIG. 150 shows an example of an internal lottery table when the setting value (setting) in the specification relating to the pachislot 1b is “1”, and the setting values (settings) are “2” to “6”. In the case of the internal lottery table, the illustration is omitted, but in the internal lottery table when the set values (settings) are “2” to “6”, the degree of advantage of the player is sequentially increased. The lottery values for at least some of the internal winning combinations are set higher than the internal lottery table when the set value (setting) is “1”.

  For example, when the setting value (setting) is “1”, the lottery value of “F_BB1 + F_Chance Lip 1” (winning number “2”) is “8”, but the setting value (setting) is “2”. When the lottery value is “9”, the setting value (setting) is “3”, the lottery value is “10”, when the setting value (setting) is “4”, the lottery value is “11”, and the setting value (setting) The lottery value when “5” is “12” and the lottery value when the setting value (setting) is “6” is defined as “12”. It can be specified that it becomes more advantageous as (setting) becomes higher. It should be noted that the bonus combination that defines the lottery value so that it becomes more advantageous as the set value (setting) becomes higher may be one type or two or more types.

  For example, when the setting value (setting) is “1”, the lottery value of “F_Bell 2” (winning number “55”) is “6”, but the setting value (setting) is “2”. The lottery value is “8”, the lottery value is “10” when the setting value (setting) is “3”, the lottery value is “12” when the setting value (setting) is “4”, and the setting value (setting) ) Is “5”, the lottery value is “14”, and the setting value (setting) is “6”. It can be specified that it becomes more advantageous as the value (setting) becomes higher. In addition, the kind of small part which prescribes the lottery value so as to become more advantageous as the set value (setting) becomes higher may be one kind, or may be two or more kinds.

  Note that the method of changing the degree of player's advantage according to the setting value (setting) is not limited to these, and as a result, the higher the setting value (setting), the higher the degree of player's advantage. Various other methods can be employed. For example, with respect to the winning probability of a specific replay combination, the lottery value can be defined so as to become more advantageous as the set value (setting) becomes higher as described above. Note that the number of replay combinations that define the lottery value so that it becomes more advantageous as the set value (setting) becomes higher may be one type or two or more types. Further, the degree of player's advantage may be changed by changing two or more kinds of lottery values among a specific bonus combination, small combination, or replay combination.

  Further, a plurality of set values (settings) are divided into a plurality of sets (for example, a set of set values (setting) is odd (1, 3, 5) and a set of set values (setting) are even (2, 4, 6). ) And the specified lottery value may be varied depending on the group. For example, in a group with an odd set value (set), “F_BB4”, “F_BB5”, and “F_BB6” (winning numbers “26” to “35”) are relatively set compared to a set with an even set value (set). The winning probability is increased, and the set value (setting) having an even number is relatively “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, and “F_BB3” (winning number “1”) than the set having an odd setting value (setting). To “25”) can be increased. In this way, the player has a set value depending on whether the winning probability of “F_BB1”, “F_BB2” and “F_BB3” is high, or the winning probability of “F_BB4”, “F_BB5” and “F_BB6” is high. It is possible to estimate to some extent whether the number is even or odd. However, even in this case, as a whole, when the setting value (setting) is “1”, the player's degree of advantage is the lowest, and when the setting value (setting) is “6”, the player The lottery value is set so that the degree of the advantage of is the highest.

[Stop control in pachislot machines according to other specification examples]
An outline of stop control in the pachislot 1b will be described below. First, as a premise, when a replay role and a bonus role are simultaneously determined as an internal winning role (including a case where a replay role is determined as an internal winning role while the bonus role is a carryover role) The stop control is performed so that the symbol combination related to the replay combination is preferentially displayed over the symbol combination related to. In addition, when a small combination and a bonus combination are simultaneously determined as an internal winning combination (including a case where a small combination is determined as an internal winning combination while the bonus combination is a carryover combination) The stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols related to the small combination is preferentially displayed over the combination of.

  When “F_Rep” (the small role / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is “1”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol “C_Replay_01” regardless of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation. Are displayed on the active line. The same applies when the bonus combination is won internally.

  When “F_chance lip 1” (the small role / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is “2”) is determined as the internal winning combination, “C_replay_02” regardless of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation. And a combination of symbols “C_Replay — 03” is displayed on the active line. The same applies when the bonus combination is won internally.

  When “F_Chance Lip 2” (the small role / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is “3”) is determined as the internal winning combination, “C_Replay_02” regardless of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation. Any combination of symbols of “C_Replay_05” is displayed on the active line. The same applies when the bonus combination is won internally.

  When “F_Bell 1” and “F_Bell 2” (small role / replay data pointer (data pointer A) are “4” and “5”) are determined as the internal winning combination, the stop order and the timing of the stop operation Regardless, the symbol combination “C_Bell — 01” is displayed on the active line. The same applies when the bonus combination is won internally.

  When “F_watermelon” (the small role / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is “6”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation timing is “C_watermelon_01” regardless of the stop order. The symbol combination “C_Watermelon — 01” is displayed on the active line and can be pulled in at the timing when the symbol (for example, “watermelon” symbol in each reel) can be drawn on the active line. If it is not timing, the combination of symbols related to winning is not displayed on the active line. The same applies to the case where the bonus combination is duplicated and won internally, but the timing of the stop operation is not the timing at which the symbols constituting the combination of symbols of “C_Watermelon_01” can be drawn on the active line, but the internal winnings If it is the timing at which the symbols constituting the combination of the bonus combination being played can be drawn on the effective line, the combination of the bonus combination symbol that is won internally is displayed on the effective line.

  When “F_Cherry 1” (the small role / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is “7”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation timing is “C_Cherry” regardless of the stop order. If the symbol (for example, the “cherry” symbol on the left reel) that constitutes the combination of the symbol “C_cherry” can be drawn on the effective line, the symbol combination “C_Cherry” is displayed on the effective line, and the symbol can be drawn. Otherwise, the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line. The same applies when the bonus combination is duplicated and won internally, but the timing of the stop operation is not the timing at which the symbols that make up the symbol combination “C_Cherry” can be drawn on the active line, but the internal winnings. If it is the timing at which the symbols constituting the combination of the bonus combination being drawn can be drawn on the active line, the combination of the bonus combination winning in the inside is displayed on the active line.

  When “F_Cherry 2” (small pointer / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is “8”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation timing is “C_Cherry” regardless of the stop order. If the timing (e.g., "cherry" symbol on the left reel) is included in the active line, the symbol combination of "C_cherry" is displayed on the active line, while the stop operation is performed. Is not the timing at which the symbol constituting the symbol combination “C_Cherry” can be drawn on the effective line, but the symbol constituting the symbol combination “C_Special — 02” (for example, “red 7” in the left reel) If the timing is such that the symbol, “yellow 7” symbol on the middle reel and “black BAR” symbol on the right reel) can be drawn onto the active line, “C_ A combination of symbols of Koto _02 "appears on the activated line. In addition, unless any symbol can be drawn, the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line. The same applies to the case where the bonus combination is won internally, but the timing of the stop operation is “C_Special” instead of the timing at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination “C_Cherry” can be drawn on the active line. It is not the timing at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination of “_02” can be drawn on the active line, but at the timing at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the bonus combination winning internally can be drawn on the active line, The combination of symbols of the bonus combination that is won internally is displayed on the active line.

  When “F_determined combination” (small combination / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is “9”) is determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is “C_special_02” regardless of the stop order. If it is the timing at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination (for example, “red 7” symbol on the left reel, “yellow 7” symbol on the middle reel, “black BAR” symbol on the right reel) can be drawn on the effective line, The symbol combination “C_special — 02” is displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line unless it is a timing that can be drawn. The same applies to the case where the bonus combination is duplicated and won internally, but the timing of the stop operation is “C_special_02”. If it is the timing at which the symbols constituting the combination of the bonus combination being played can be drawn on the effective line, the combination of the bonus combination symbol that is won internally is displayed on the effective line.

  When “F_RB combination” and “F_CB combination” (small combination / replay data pointer (data pointer A) are “10” and “11”) are determined as the internal winning combination, the stop order is the right reel 3R, the middle reel 3C and the left reel 3L in this order, and the timing of the stop operation for the right reel 3R is the symbol positions “10” to “12”, and the timing of the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is the symbol positions “7” to “11”. ”Or“ 16 ”to“ 20 ”, and when the timing of the stop operation on the left reel 3L is the symbol position“ 0 ”or“ 1 ”, the symbol combination“ C_special_01 ”or“ C_special_02 ” Is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the stop order is other than the above, and when the timing of the stop operation is other than the above, “C_Bell_01”, “C_Watermelon_01” or “C_Cherry” is selected depending on the stop operation timing. Any combination of symbols is displayed on the active line.

[Gameability in pachislot machines according to other specification examples]
As described above, the pachi-slot 1b according to another specification example does not have an ART function. Therefore, in order to increase the medal, the player plays a game in the normal gaming state while expecting a transition to the bonus gaming state. Do. In the RT0 gaming state, transition to the RT1 gaming state is based on the display of “C_Replay_01”, and transition to the RT2 gaming state is based on the display of “C_Bell_01”. In the RT1 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state, although the total winning probability of the replay role itself hardly increases as compared with the RT0 gaming state, the winning probability of “F_Chance Lip 1” and “F_Chance Lip 2” increases.

  Here, since “F_chance lip 1” and “F_chance lip 2” are relatively easily determined as an internal winning combination at the same time as the bonus combination, if “F_chance lip 1” and “F_chance lip 2” are determined, The player is expected to win the bonus combination. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, when any of “C_Replay_02” to “C_Replay_05” is displayed by winning such “F_Chance Lip 1” and “F_Chance Lip 2”, the RT3 gaming state is entered. Transition. In the RT3 gaming state, as in the RT5 gaming state, the total winning probability of the replay role is dramatically increased compared to the RT0 gaming state, so even if the bonus combination is not determined as an internal winning combination at the same time, It is possible to give a sense of expectation as if between bonus flags.

  In addition, in order to further improve the expectation as if it were between such bonus flags, each replay combination is lottery with the same probability or approximately the same probability in the RT3 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state. Also good. Further, the same presentation may be performed in the RT3 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state, or the same continuous presentation may be performed over a predetermined period (for example, 12 games). In this case, in the final game of the continuous production, if it is RT3 gaming state, it is indicated that the bonus combination is not won, and if it is RT5 gaming state, it is indicated that the bonus combination is won. Also good.

  If the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the game proceeds to the RT4 gaming state or the RT5 gaming state between the bonus flags, and the combination of symbols related to the determined bonus combination is displayed. Transition to state or MB gaming state.

  As described above, in the BB gaming state, the inserted number is “1”, and basically, 14 medals are paid out every time the game is performed. Therefore, the player can acquire many medals. it can. However, the value of the bonus end number counter in the BB gaming state is “321”, and when 14 medals are paid out in all games, the game ends in 23 games (14 × 23 = 322). ). On the other hand, if 13 medals are paid out in one game, the game ends in 24 games (14 × 22 + 13 × 1 = 321). In other words, in a single game in the BB gaming state, if a game is played at the timing of the stop sequence and the stop operation described above, a game with a high level of technical intervention is realized that more medals can be obtained. Yes.

  Similarly, in the MB gaming state, the inserted number is “2”, and basically, 15 medals are paid out every time the game is played, so that the player can acquire many medals. it can. However, the value of the bonus end number counter in the BB game state is “104”, and when 15 medals are paid out in all games, the game ends in 7 games (15 × 7 = 105). ). On the other hand, if 14 medals are paid out in one game, the game ends in 8 games (15 × 6 + 14 × 1 = 104). In other words, in a single game in the MB gaming state, if a game is played at the timing of the stop sequence and the stop operation described above, a game with a high level of technical intervention is achieved, in which more medals can be obtained. Yes.

  Although the pachislot 1b according to another specification example does not have an ART function, the specification has an RT function, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specification may not have an RT function. Specifically, the RT1 to RT5 gaming states may not be defined, the gaming state in the normal gaming state may be one, and the increase / decrease rate of medals may be changed only depending on whether or not to shift to the bonus gaming state. Further, the type of bonus combination and the value of the bonus end number counter can be changed as appropriate, and the winning probability of each internal winning combination can be changed as appropriate.

[Direction control of bonus game state in pachi-slots related to other specification examples]
In the pachi-slot 1b according to another specification example, the ART is not provided and the bonus operation is mainly described as a specification that allows the player to increase the game medium. There is still room to improve the performance of the player in order to improve the interest of the player. Therefore, in the following, with reference to FIG. 153 and FIG. 154, the bonus game state effect control applicable to the pachislot 1 b according to another specification example will be described. Needless to say, the bonus game state effect control described below can also be applied to the pachislot la described above, that is, the gaming machine having the ART function. In this case, since the bonus game state and the ART game state are still advantageous for the player, similar effect control may be performed in the ART game state.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example of a music selection screen at the time of a bonus operation in the other specification example, and FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating a change in the output content of the music in the other specification example.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in the pachislot 1b according to another example of the specification, when the BB gaming state is entered, at the start, a plurality of songs (for example, songs 1 to 5) are selected in the BB gaming state. The player can select the music to be output. In addition, you may comprise so that a player can select similarly about the music output in MB game state.

  Specifically, a music selection button (music selection area) for selecting music 1 to music 5 is displayed on the main screen 111, and a desired music is selected by touching the music selection button. Can be done. In addition, a random button (music random selection area) that allows a music to be selected at random is displayed for a player who does not have a desired music or is not interested in music selection itself. By randomly touching this random button, the music randomly selected on the gaming machine side is determined.

  Although not described in detail, in FIG. 153, the music selection buttons for music 1 to music 3 and the random button can be selected, while the music selection buttons for music 4 and music 5 cannot be selected. (In FIG. 153, the display is reversed black and white). This is controlled so that it can be selected when a predetermined condition (release condition) is satisfied in the player's game information stored in the server 200 described later using the above-described mobile terminal cooperation function. It is supposed to be. Of course, in the selection of music to be output in the BB gaming state, all music can be selected from the beginning regardless of the player's game information stored in the server 200 described later.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 153, the pachislot 1b according to another specification example is further configured so that the player can change the output content of the selected music piece.

  Specifically, on the main screen 111, when touching the music selection button of a desired music, the touch operation on the music selection button is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) (that is, long press). The output contents can be changed so that the output is started from the middle part of the desired music (for example, No. 2 of the music).

  In the pachi-slot 1b according to another specification example, as the basic music composition when the output content is not changed by the player, the first part (for example, No. 1 of the music) and the subsequent second A part (for example, No. 2 of the music piece) can be configured to be output, or only the first part can be configured to be output. In any case, the output content of the music selected by the player's operation is changed.

  In addition, in the pachislot 1b according to another specification example, a configuration in which a touch input unit (touch panel) 31a is arranged on the main screen 111 is taken as an example, and a desired operation is performed by touching a music selection button displayed on the main screen 111. In this example, the output content is changed by long-pressing the music selection button. However, this is not the only mode for recognizing the player's music selection operation or output content change operation. It is not something that can be done. For example, it is assumed that an output content change button (output content change area) for changing the output content is separately displayed on the main screen 111, and the output content is changed by touching the output content change button. It may be.

  For example, in the configuration in which the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a is arranged on the sub screen 113, the music selection button or the output content change button described above may be displayed on the sub screen 113, or the main screen A screen as shown in FIG. 153 is displayed on the screen 111, and a movement selection operation button for receiving a movement selection operation such as a cross key and a determination button for receiving a determination operation are displayed on the sub screen 113, for example. Then, a music selection operation and an output content change operation may be appropriately performed by a touch operation on these buttons. That is, the music selection operation and the output content change operation may be appropriately performed by moving the above-described cursor by the above-described operation.

  Further, for example, the music selection operation or the output content change operation may be appropriately performed by operating the enter button 28 or the select button 29 described above, or the above-described operation is performed on condition that the game is not progressing. The music selection operation and the output content change operation may be appropriately performed by operating one or more of the MAX bet button 14, the 1 bet button 15, the start lever 16, and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R.

  Further, for example, a progress bar indicating the length of the selected music piece may be displayed on the main screen 111 so that more detailed output contents can be changed. Specifically, when a song is selected by the song selection button, the above progress bar is displayed, and by touching an arbitrary part of the progress bar, output is started from the arbitrary part. An output content change operation can be performed. In other words, the form of changing the output content of the music is not limited to the form in which the output starting from No. 1 of the music described above is changed to the output starting from No. 2, but from the place desired by the player. This includes all forms in which the output content can be changed so that output is started.

  Further, for example, the change of the output content may be performed for all the music pieces that can be selected by the player, or may be performed for only some music pieces. Specifically, if the music that can be selected by the player is a music composed of a predetermined length (for example, composed of at least No. 1 and No. 2), the output contents can be changed for all the music. In the case where the specific music is configured with a predetermined length, but the other music is configured with a length shorter than the predetermined length (for example, configured with only No. 1), the specific music Only the output contents may be changed.

  Further, in the pachislot 1b according to another specification example, at the start of the BB gaming state, it is possible to perform the output content change operation together with the music selection operation, but the time when the music selection operation can be performed and the time when the output content change operation can be performed Can be at different times. For example, the time when the output content changing operation can be performed can be an arbitrary time after the start of the BB gaming state, or both the starting time of the BB gaming state and the arbitrary time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, a description will be given of an output example of music when the output content is changed for music output in the BB gaming state.

  FIG. 154 (a) shows that when the music selected in the BB gaming state is output, the first part of the music is output as the basic output pattern from the start of the BB gaming state. When the output is completed, the interlude portion is output until the end of the BB gaming state. That is, the second part of the music is an output pattern that is not output.

  FIG. 154 (b) shows that when the music selected in the BB gaming state is output, the first part of the music is output as the basic output pattern from the start of the BB gaming state, and the first part of the music is displayed. When the output of is finished, the interlude part is output for a predetermined period, then the second part of the music following the first part of the music is output, and when the output of the second part of the music is finished, the BB gaming state ends thereafter In this example, the interlude part (or the later part) is output. That is, this is an output pattern in which the first part of the music piece and the second part of the music piece subsequent thereto are output.

  Here, in any of the output patterns of (a) and (b) of FIG. 154, the length of the first portion of the music is shorter than the minimum time required from the start to the end of the BB gaming state (BB digestion minimum time). Is set to be a long time (for example, 150 seconds). Note that the BB digestion minimum time can be obtained by multiplying the minimum time required to perform one game by the possible number of games in the BB gaming state. In the pachislot 1b according to another specification example, It is obtained by multiplying the minimum time (4.1 seconds) required to play one game by the possible number of games (24 times) in the BB gaming state. In this case, the minimum time required to play one game is not the time “4.1” seconds required for the weight process, but the time previously defined as the average value of the players (for example, 6 seconds) ). In this case, the possible number of games in the BB gaming state may be based on the normal “23” times instead of “24” times when the game can be performed one time more than usual by technical intervention. it can.

  When the music is selected by the player's music selection operation and it is once determined that the music is output in the output pattern of (a) or (b) of FIG. 154, the player's output content changing operation (FIG. 154) is further performed. When the change operation is performed, the output content is output from the start of the BB gaming state, the second part of the music is output, and the output of the second part of the music is finished, as shown in FIG. Then, it can change to the output pattern comprised so that an interlude part may be output until completion | finish of BB gaming state after that.

  In FIG. 154, an example is described in which the length of the first part of the music and the length of the second part of the music are the same length or substantially the same length, but the present invention is not limited to this. The music may be configured such that the length of the first part of the music and the length of the second part of the music are different from each other.

  Further, the output pattern in which music is output may correspond to the type of bonus game state. For example, for the BB gaming state, in the BB gaming state (BB1 to BB3 gaming state) based on the establishment of BB1 to BB3, the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) is output, and BB4 to BB6. In the BB gaming state based on the establishment of (BB4 to BB6 gaming state), the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) may be output. Similarly, when the music selection operation and the output content change operation are possible even in the MB gaming state, the MB gaming state in the MB gaming state (MB1 and MB2 gaming state) based on the establishment of MB1 and MB2 is shown in FIG. The music selected by the output pattern of (b) is output, and in the MB gaming state (MB3 gaming state) based on the establishment of MB3, the music selected by the output pattern of (a) in FIG. 154 is output. It is good also as what is done.

Also, for example, in the BB gaming state, the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) is output, and in the MB gaming state, the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) is output. It may be output. Note that, as described above, such a configuration may be applied to an ART gaming state, which is an advantageous section in which a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified. For example, in an ART gaming state in which the degree of advantage is relatively large (or small), the music selected by the output pattern in FIG. 154 (b) is output, and the degree of advantage is relatively large. In the small (or large) ART gaming state, the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) may be output. Further, in this way, the output pattern of (a) or (b) of FIG. 154 is associated with the degree of advantage (for example, the value of the bonus end number counter) in the bonus game state. May be.

  Further, as described above, the bonus game state in which the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) is output and the bonus game in which the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) is output. When the state is defined, the output content changing operation may be enabled only in the bonus game state in which the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) is output. In other words, the output content change operation is not possible in the bonus game state in which the first and second parts of the music can be output, and the output content change operation is possible in the bonus game state in which only the first part of the music can be output. You may do it. Further, in the bonus game state in which the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) is output, if the first part of the music is not heard once using the above-described mobile terminal cooperation function, The output content to the number portion may not be changed.

  In the pachi-slot 1b according to another specification example, the player can not only select a desired piece of music by performing the bonus game state presentation control as described above, but the selected piece of music is output from a desired part. Since the output content can be changed as described above, it is possible to select music that matches the preference and situation of the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) can be adopted as the basic music output pattern when the output content is not changed by the player, or the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b). Can also be adopted.

  For example, when the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) is adopted as the basic music output pattern when the output contents are not changed by the player, when the special conditions related to the game are satisfied, FIG. The music may be output according to the output pattern of (b). That is, normally, only the first part of the music can be heard, but if the special condition is satisfied, the first part of the music and the second part following the music may be heard. Various conditions can be adopted as the special conditions. For example, in the game information of a player stored in the server 200 described later using the mobile terminal cooperation function described above, a predetermined condition (open condition) ) Can be adopted, or it can be adopted that the game can be shifted to the BB gaming state again within a predetermined game (for example, 100 games) after the bonus gaming state is finished.

  Under this assumption, even if the special condition is not satisfied, if an output content change operation is performed, the output pattern is changed to the output pattern shown in FIG. Also good. That is, the second portion of the music that cannot be normally heard may be heard by performing an output content changing operation. Thereby, since the significance regarding the change of the output content of a music can be raised more, the interest regarding music selection can further be improved.

  Further, for example, when the output pattern of (b) in FIG. 154 is adopted as the basic music output pattern when the output contents are not changed by the player, in the pachislot 1b according to another specification example, 1 The length of the number portion is set to be longer than the minimum time (BB digestion minimum time) required from the start to the end of the BB gaming state. Here, for example, a player who does not have enough time, such as when the closing time of a game store is approaching, usually wants to digest the game as soon as possible. For this reason, such a player can listen to only a predetermined part (the first part) of the music all the time even if the desired music is selected every time in the BB game state. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in the pachi-slot 1b according to another specification example, when the output content change operation is performed, since it can be heard immediately from the second part of the music, the preference that the player wants to digest the game as soon as possible is achieved. Even a player who has such a situation or a player who is in a situation that is in need of such a need can prevent the interest related to music selection from declining and can improve the interest related to music selection.

  Further, for example, when the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) is adopted as the basic music output pattern when the output content is not changed by the player, in the pachislot 1b according to another specification example, the BB gaming state If the special condition is satisfied, the output content changing operation may be performed during the BB gaming state. That is, when the special condition is satisfied during the BB gaming state, the output content changing operation may be performed even during the BB gaming state. Various conditions can be adopted as the special condition. For example, in the game information of a player stored in the server 200 described later using the above-described mobile terminal cooperation function, a predetermined condition is set during the BB game state. It is also possible to adopt that the above condition (opening condition) is satisfied, or that 13 medals have been paid out in at least one game during the BB gaming state (ie, extending the BB gaming state) Can be adopted).

  In this case, when the BB gaming state is started, the output content changing operation may be performed together with the music selection operation, as described above. In this case, when the BB gaming state is started, the output content changing operation may be performed regardless of whether or not the special condition is satisfied. For example, the special condition may be changed in the previous BB gaming state. If the condition is satisfied, an output content change operation may be performed.

  In addition, when the output content change operation is performed based on the special condition being satisfied during the BB gaming state, if the first part of the music is output, The output may be newly started from the beginning of the part, or the output may be started from the position corresponding to the first part of the music being output in the second part of the music. For example, when the first part of the music is composed of A melody, B melody, and rust, and the second part of the music has the same configuration, the A melody of the first part of the music is being output. When the output content change operation is performed, the output content is changed so that the A melody of the second part of the music is output, and the output content is changed when the B melody of the first part of the music is output When the operation is performed, the output content is changed so that the B melody of the second part of the music is output, and the output content changing operation is performed when the rust of the first part of the music is output. In such a case, the output content can be changed so that the sub of the second part of the music is output. In addition, when the output content change operation is performed based on the special condition being satisfied during the BB gaming state, if the second part of the music is output, the second of the music in the BB gaming state is output. You may make it start output newly from the head of a part (namely, cue reproduction | regeneration).

  Thereby, the new game nature regarding the music selection in BB game state can be added. In addition, for example, when it is possible to perform the output content change operation even when the BB gaming state starts, the player who has forgotten to perform the output content change operation has an interest in music selection. It is possible to prevent the decline.

[Special state control in pachislot machines according to other specification examples]
In the pachi-slot 1b according to another specification example, the ART function is not described and the bonus operation is mainly described as a specification that allows the player to increase the game medium. Under such a specification, for example, a set value ( If the winning probability of the bonus combination varies according to (setting), it is determined whether or not a specific setting value (for example, setting value (setting) 6) having a high degree of player advantage is set. Of interest. Therefore, in the pachislot 1b according to another specification example, a special state is provided as a state where a special effect that can suggest the possibility that a specific set value is set is executable or is easily executed. It is possible to make the player's expectation different depending on whether or not the state is controlled. Below, with reference to FIG. 155, the special state control applicable to the pachislot 1b which concerns on another example of a specification is demonstrated. Needless to say, the special state control described below can also be applied to the pachislot la that has been described so far, that is, the gaming machine having the ART function.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special state control process in the other specification example. The special state control process is executed under the control of the sub CPU 102, and is executed, for example, as part of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) when a command transmitted from the main CPU 93 is received. Alternatively, it may be executed as part of a periodic interrupt process of the sub CPU 102 (not shown).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines in the pachi-slot 1b whether or not it is a power failure return or setting change time (S1041). That is, in the pachislot 1b, the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is when the power is turned on again after the power interruption state occurs once, or when the set value is newly set (changed). To do. If it is determined in S1041 that the power interruption is restored or the setting is changed (YES in S1041), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of determination games for determining whether or not to control the special state (0). clear. Thereby, for example, when the game store is opened, the determined number of games becomes zero.

  If it is determined in S1041 that it is not a power failure return or setting change (when S1041 is NO), or after the processing of S1042, the sub CPU 102 sets the set setting value to “6” (specific setting value). It is determined whether or not (S1043). Note that the specific set value for which YES is determined in S1043 is not limited to the case where the set value is “6”. For example, the specific set value for which YES is determined in S1043 may be any one of “4”, “5”, and “6” (that is, the set value is “4” or more). In S1043, when it is determined that the set setting value is not “6” (specific setting value) (when S1043 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1048.

  On the other hand, in S1043, when it is determined that the set setting value is “6” (specific setting value) (when S1043 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that one game has been performed. Accordingly, 1 is added to the number of determined games (S1044). The timing for adding 1 to the determined number of games may be when the game starts (for example, when a start command is received) or when the game ends (for example, when a display command is received).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the determined number of games is “1000” (S1045). If it is determined in S1045 that the determined number of games is not “1000” (NO in S1045), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1048.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1045 that the determined number of games is “1000” (S1045 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the special state flag (S1046). The special state flag is data for controlling to the special state, and is controlled to the special state when the special state flag is on. Next, the sub CPU 102 stores the current date and time (S1047). Of course, even when the special state flag is already on, the processing of S1046 and S1047 may be performed. In this case, the special state flag is kept on in the processing of S1046, and in the processing of S1047, The current date and time is stored again. That is, the period during which the special state continues is extended by overwriting the stored date and time.

  In the process of S1047, the current date and time can be stored with reference to the date and time set by the time setting in the hall menu (see FIG. 129), or built in the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101). It is also possible to acquire the date and time from an RTC (real-time clock) (not shown) attached to the outside and store the current date and time.

  In S1043, when it is determined that the set value is not “6” (specific setting value) (when S1043 is NO), in S1045, when it is determined that the determined number of games is not “1000” (S1045). If NO is determined), and after the processing of S1047, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special state flag is ON (S1048). If it is determined in S1048 that the special state flag is not on (S1048 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the special state control process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1048 that the special state flag is ON (S1048 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a difference between the date and time stored in S1047 and the current time exceeds 72 hours. Whether or not (S1049). In S1049, when it is determined that the difference between the date and time stored in the process of S1047 and the current time exceeds 72 hours (when S1049 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the special state flag (S1050). . That is, the sub CPU 102 ends the special state when 72 hours have elapsed from the date and time when the special state flag was turned on (or the date and time when the special state flag was overwritten thereafter). After the process of S1050, the sub CPU 102 ends the special state control process. In S1049, when it is determined that the difference between the date and time stored in S1047 and the current time does not exceed 72 hours (when S1049 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the special state control process. Exit.

  In the special state control process, the number of determined games is initialized in the process of S1042, the determined number of games is incremented by 1 in the process of S1044, and the determined number of games is determined to be “1000” in the process of S1045. In addition, the special state flag is turned on to start the special state. However, for example, the setting value is “6” (specific setting value) in the process of S1043 without performing determination regarding the number of determination games. If it is determined, the processes of S1046 and S1047 may be performed. That is, when the setting value is “6” (specific setting value), the special state may be started without determining the number of games played with the specific setting value.

  In the special state control process, whether or not to end the special state is determined by determining whether or not the difference between the stored date and time and the current date and time exceeds 72 hours in the process of S1049. ing. That is, the special state is terminated when the predetermined period of time from when the special state is determined to be set reaches 72 hours. Here, in the pachi-slot 1b according to another specification example, the predetermined period is set to 72 hours, so that the special state can be continued over a plurality of different business days in the amusement store. However, the predetermined period can be arbitrarily set. For example, the time may be shorter than 72 hours or may be longer than 72 hours.

  In addition, the technique for allowing the special state to continue over a plurality of different business days in the amusement store is not limited to this. For example, the special state flag is turned off when the number of times of power failure recovery after the power failure recovery (see S1401) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times) after the special state flag is turned on. Also good. In this case, in order to distinguish from the power interruption state at the time of maintenance of the gaming machine or the occurrence of a power failure, only the number of times of power interruption recovery when the time of the power interruption state is a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours) or more. Should be counted.

  Further, for example, when the number of setting changes (see S1401) after the special state flag is turned on becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the special state flag is turned off. Also good. In this case, when the period during which the setting is not changed becomes a specific period or a specific number of days, the special state flag may be turned off even if the number of setting changes is not the predetermined number.

  Further, for example, when the above-described RTC or the like is provided, a date is simply acquired from the RTC, and a predetermined number of days (for example, 4 days) has passed in comparison with the acquired date and the recorded date and time. The special state flag may be turned off.

  In addition, it is possible to allow the amusement store to arbitrarily set a predetermined period until the special state flag is turned off, the number of times of power interruption return, the number of setting changes, or the predetermined number of days by setting in the hall menu described above. Good. Thereby, a special effect can be performed on the conditions according to the intention of the game store side.

  In the above description, the special state can be continued for a predetermined period, and the predetermined period can be continued over a plurality of different business days in an amusement store. “Different business days” is an expression for convenience of explanation, and it does not matter whether the amusement store is actually open. In other words, the predetermined period only needs to be continued over a plurality of days. In addition, it can be modified as appropriate according to various requirements such as market trends of gaming machines and restrictions on the rules, and for example, it is intended to exclude those in which a predetermined period is not set to be sustainable over a plurality of days. Absent. That is, the predetermined period may be set to end in one day unless the intention of the present embodiment is significantly deviated.

  In addition, when the special state is set to a state where the special effect can be executed, “executable” means that the special effect is executed when the predetermined effect is established when the special state flag is on, and the special state is Even when the predetermined production trigger is established when the flag is off, not only the aspect in which the special production is not executed, but also the predetermined production opportunity in which the special production is executed when the special state flag is on is established. In addition, it includes a mode in which the predetermined effect trigger that the special effect is executed when the special state flag is OFF is not established.

  In addition, when the special state is set to a state in which the special effect is easy to be executed, “easy to execute” means that the special effect is executed when a predetermined effect is established when the special state flag is on. If the probability is determined to be set high, and if the special effect flag is off and the predetermined effect trigger is established, the probability that the special effect is determined to be executed is only set to be low In addition, when the special state flag is on, the probability that a predetermined effect that the special effect will be executed is established is set high, and when the special state flag is off, the special effect is executed. It includes a mode in which the probability that a predetermined performance opportunity is established is set low.

  In addition, a special effect is definite when a predetermined effect is established, that it is in a special state (that is, a specific set value has been set during the past maximum of 4 days including today). An effect that informs the user that there is a possibility of a special condition (that is, a specific set value may have been set during the past four days including today) It may be.

  For example, a predetermined production opportunity is established at the end of a specific bonus game state (for example, MB game state), and at this time, an effect in which one character is displayed from a plurality of characters is performed. In such a case, an effect that a specific character is displayed that is not normally displayed (when the special state flag is off) is executed as a special effect, so that the special state is definitely notified. It may be. Alternatively, if the effect that the specific character is displayed has a high probability of being executed when it is in the special state and the probability of being executed when it is not the special state is low, the specific character is displayed. It may be suggested that there is a possibility of a special state by executing the production.

  Moreover, about such an effect, the effect which definitely alert | reports that it is a special state (for example, effect A), the effect (for example, effect B) which suggests the possibility of a special state, and a special state For example, in the case of a special state, the effect A is executed with a probability of 10%, and 60% The effect B is executed with a probability and the effect C is executed with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, if it is not a special state, the effect B is executed with a probability of 50% and the effect C is executed with a probability of 50%. It can also be done.

  In addition, the predetermined production opportunity which can perform a special production is not restricted to what is established when it mentioned above. For example, it may be established at the start of the MB gaming state or during the MB gaming state, or may be established at the beginning of the BB gaming state, during the BB gaming state, or at the end of the BB gaming state. Good. Further, it may be established during the normal gaming state, or may be established at the start of a specific RT gaming state (for example, RT3), during the specific RT gaming state, or at the end of the specific RT gaming state. You may do.

  In the pachi-slot 1b according to another specification example, when the player can grasp the setting state of the set value during a predetermined period (for example, a plurality of business days in the amusement store) by performing the special state control as described above. In addition, when a special performance is executed, there is a possibility that an advantageous setting value may be set on the gaming machine in which the player is playing, so the player plays a game with expectation. To do. In addition, since the special state can be continued for a predetermined period (for example, extending over a plurality of business days of the amusement store), the amusement store can set the setting value with sharpness, and the appropriate profit Can be secured. That is, according to the pachi-slot 1b according to another specification example, it is possible to improve game motivation while achieving a balance of profits between the player and the game store.

  Further, in the pachislot 1b according to another specification example, when it is determined to set the special state, the time until the special state is ended is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution time of special effects from being biased, and to manage the period during which the special state continues more accurately. It can be carried out.

  In addition, in the pachislot 1b according to another specification example, when it is decided to set the special state, the time until the special state is ended is started, and thereafter, the special state is further set. When the condition for determining is satisfied, the time measurement is started again from the beginning. That is, the time until the special state is finished is overwritten. As a result, for example, when the special state continues for more than 5 days, the player may be able to grasp the setting status of the set value on a plurality of business days in the amusement store more accurately. Can be improved. In addition, if the player wants to grasp such a setting state, the player needs to visit the gaming machine store frequently, so that the operation of the gaming machine can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to play for a longer period of time while balancing the profits between the player and the game store.

  Further, in the pachislot 1b according to another specification example, when a specific set value is set and a game for a specific period is performed, the pachislot 1b is controlled to a specific state. Thus, for example, a specific set value is set once only for the game store to control to a specific state, and then a set value that is less advantageous than the specific set value is set when the player plays a game. This can prevent acts such as playing games. Therefore, even when a special state that can be continued over a predetermined period (for example, across a plurality of business days of a game store) is provided, it is possible to perform equitable presentation control for both the player and the game store.

[Data accumulation by using the mobile terminal linkage function]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, an example of data accumulation by using the above-described mobile terminal cooperation function in the pachislot 1 will be described. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character customization screen in the pachi-slot 1, FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining various data related to character customization in the pachi-slot 1, and FIG. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the delivery of data.

  As described above, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, by using the mobile terminal cooperation function, that is, the player uses his / her mobile terminal to log in and out of the pachislot 1 so far. Various kinds of game information (various data) such as game information related to the results of the game, game information provided as appropriate according to the progress of the game, and game information for storing the result of the player's selection operation are stored. It is possible. A method for accumulating various game information (various data) in cooperation with the server 200 described later will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, when the item of the unimemo menu described above (see FIG. 138) is displayed on the main screen 111 or the sub screen 113, for example, the item “customize” is also displayed, and this “customize” menu is selected. Then, a character customization screen as shown in FIG. 156 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 156, on the character customization screen, a character selection button (“A” to “D” in the “character” frame in FIG. 156) for selecting the character is displayed, and the character is selected. Then, an image showing the selected character is displayed on the left side of the screen.

  Also, below the character selection button, there are costume selection buttons (“A” to “D” in the “costume” frame in FIG. 156) for selecting a costume (costume) on the display of the selected character. Displayed below the costume selection button is an item selection button (“A” to “H” in the “item” frame in FIG. 156) for selecting the possession (item) on the display of the selected character. ) Is displayed.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when a character is selected on this customization screen and a costume or item is selected, the customized character is used for production. In addition, the type of the selected character, the type of the selected costume, and the type of the selected item can be stored as one piece of game information for storing the result of the player's selection operation. Therefore, once the player customizes the character, the player can restore the customized character simply by logging in.

  Among selectable characters, pachislots between different models that use the same or similar motifs and story characteristics but different specifications (for example, one model is the above-mentioned pachislot la, and other models are There are cases where both a common character used in common in the above-described pachislot 1b) and a unique character used uniquely in pachislot between different models are included.

  Among the costumes that can be selected, there are common costumes (for common characters) that are commonly used in the above-mentioned different types of pachislots for customizing the display of the common character, and the above-mentioned different types of pachislots. In some cases, unique costumes (for common characters) that are used uniquely are included. In addition, for customizing the display of the unique character, a common costume (for a unique character) commonly used in the pachislot between the different models described above, and a unique costume (used for each pachislot between the different models described above) May be included).

  Among the selectable items, a common item (for a common character) used in common between different models described above for customizing the display of the common character, and a pachislot between different models described above. May include unique items (for common characters) that are used uniquely. In addition, for customizing the display of the unique character, the common item (for the unique character) commonly used in the pachislot between the different models described above, and the unique item (used for each pachislot between the different models described above) May be included).

  In addition, it is not possible to select from costumes and items that can be selected at first, and if a predetermined release condition can be established according to the progress of the game for each model, a new selection is made. May include what is possible. As described above, the types of costumes and items that can be newly selected in response to the establishment of the release condition can be stored as one piece of game information that is appropriately provided according to the progress of the game. Therefore, once the player is allowed to select a costume or item, the player can restore the state where such a costume or item can be selected simply by logging in. Note that characters may also be included that can be newly selected when a predetermined release condition can be established according to the progress of the game for each model.

  In addition, various conditions can be defined as various game information provision conditions as release conditions (game information provision conditions) according to the progress of the game. For example, the usage count (login count) of the mobile terminal cooperation function has become 1, 3, 5 times, the cumulative number of games played has become 1000 times, 3000 times, 5000 times, bonus The cumulative number of times transferred to the gaming state is 10, 30, and 50 times, the cumulative number of times transferred to the BB gaming state is 10, 30, and 50 times, the MB gaming state The cumulative number of times of the transition to has reached 10, 30, 50, and the bonus combination has been won independently (for example, any one of the winning numbers “1”, “9” and “18”) If one provision condition is associated with one piece of game information, such as the fact that a certain effect (for example, special effect) has been performed, and the provision condition is satisfied, the corresponding game information is accumulated. You can do so.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, various data relating to character customization will be cited as an example of game information provided as appropriate according to the progress of the game, and differences in the configuration of the various data among a plurality of different models will be described. . In FIG. 157, one model is the above-described pachislot la, and the other model is the above-described pachislot 1b.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the pachislot la, the data corresponding to “character A” and “character B” as the data indicating the common character, and “character E” and “character F” as the data indicating the unique character are displayed. Corresponding data is defined as game information.

  In the pachi-slot la, the data indicating the common costume (for the common character) is “for character A: A” to “for character A: C” and “for character B: A” to “for character B: C”. The data corresponding to, the data indicating the unique costume (for common character), the data corresponding to “for character A: E” and “for character B: E”, and the data indicating the specific costume (for unique character), “ Corresponds to “for character E: A” to “for character E: C”, “for character E: E”, “for character F: A” to “for character F: C”, and “for character F: E”. Data is defined as game information. Note that, for example, data corresponding to “for character E: A” to “for character E: C” may be data indicating a common costume (for a unique character). Moreover, open conditions ah can each determine arbitrary conditions.

  Further, in the pachislot la, as data indicating a common item (for common character) and / or a common item (for unique character), data corresponding to “item A” to “item D”, unique item (for common character) As data indicating a unique item (for a unique character), data corresponding to “item I” to “item L” is defined as game information. In addition, open conditions 1-8 can respectively define arbitrary conditions.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 157, in the pachislot 1b, the data corresponding to “character A” and “character B” as the data indicating the common character, and the “character C” and “character D” as the data indicating the unique character are displayed. Is defined as game information.

  Further, in the pachislot 1b, as data indicating the common costume (for the common character), “for character A: A” to “for character A: C” and “for character B: A” to “for character B: C”. The data corresponding to, the data indicating the unique costume (for common character), the data corresponding to “for character A: D” and “for character B: D”, and the data indicating the unique costume (for unique character), “ Data corresponding to “character C: A” to “character C: D” and “character D: A” to “character D: D” are defined as game information. Note that, for example, data corresponding to “for character C: A” to “for character C: C” may be data indicating a common costume (for a unique character). In addition, open conditions ah can each determine arbitrary conditions.

  Further, in the pachislot 1b, as data indicating the common item (for common character) and / or the common item (for unique character), data corresponding to “item A” to “item D”, unique item (for common character) As data indicating a unique item (for a unique character), data corresponding to “item E” to “item H” is defined as game information. The opening conditions 1, 2, 5 to 10 can each be set to an arbitrary condition.

  Here, the data corresponding to “for character A: A” to “for character A: C”, “for character B: A” to “for character B: C”, and “item A” to “item D” are: When one of the pachislot 1a and the pachislot 1b satisfies the release condition, even if the other does not satisfy the release condition, the release condition is assumed to be satisfied in the other pachislot, and the game information is updated. Has been accumulated.

  Also, the release conditions of “for character A: A” to “for character A: C” in the pachislot la, the release conditions of “for character A: A” to “for character A: C” in the pachislot 1b, and “ Character B: A "to" Character B: C "release conditions and pachislot 1b" Character B: A "to" Character B: C "release conditions," Item C "and" Item "in pachislot 1a The release condition of “D” is different from the release condition of “item C” and “item D” in the pachislot 1b. That is, the common data shown in FIG. 157 can set different release conditions. Of course, the individual data shown in FIG. 157 can also set different release conditions.

  In this case, for example, as a condition for releasing specific common data, the number of logins is “1” in the model described as the pachislot 1a, and the login number is “5” in the model described as the pachislot 1b. Of the same types of opening conditions, it is possible to set an opening condition in which a different degree of achievement is defined. In the model described as the pachislot 1a, the number of logins is “1”, and in the model described as the pachislot 1b. May set different types of release conditions, such as setting the cumulative number of games played to “1000”.

  Note that the common data and individual data are not limited to data for customizing a character, as described above. For example, the cumulative number of games (the number of games) is the common data, the number of logins is the individual data, the cumulative number of games that are the common data (the number of games) is a certain value or more, and the individual data If the number of logins is a certain value or more in each of the models described as the pachislot 1a and the models described as the pachislot 1b, various effects in the gaming machines of each model, for example, image effects (video on the liquid crystal display device 11) Effect by displaying), sound effect (effect by outputting effect sound from speakers 20L and 20R), lamp effect (effect by lighting headlamp 21 and reel lamp 22, etc.), effect effect (rotating role) Some of the effects such as effects by the object 123 may be performed differently from the normal effects. Specifically, the display mode of the frame display of the display screen (for example, the main screen 111) of the liquid crystal display device 11 may be changed, or the lighting mode of the headlamp 21 may be changed. Moreover, not only the effect mode at the time of executing such a normal effect but also the display mode of the menu screen on the guide menu screen described above may be changed, for example. These are also examples, and all aspects of changing the presentation according to various common data and individual data are applicable to the present embodiment.

  In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 that can transfer data corresponding to the game information corresponding to the game situation for each player to the server 200 described later, the game information that can be stored in the server 200 described later includes, for example, Specific information (for example, individual data shown in FIG. 157) that is unique to each model of the model described as the pachislot 1a or the model described as the pachislot 1b, the model described as the pachislot 1a, and the model described as the pachislot 1b Common information (for example, common data shown in FIG. 157) that is common information can be included.

  Thus, for example, when these models are installed in a game store at the same time, the player can change the model for playing the game while enjoying the accumulation of game information. In addition, it is possible to further improve the interest in the stored game information. Also, for example, if these models are installed in a game store at different times, the game information accumulated in the previously installed model will not be wasted, and will continue in the model installed later. Since the game information can be accumulated, the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved, and the brand power of the gaming machine having such a relationship can be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the common information includes, between the character used for the effect performed in the model described as the pachislot 1a and the character used for the effect performed in the model described as the pachislot 1b, Character-related information related to commonly used characters can be included, and the character display mode can be changed by this character-related information. Thereby, since the contents of the production can be changed according to the outcome of the game across a plurality of models, the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the condition that the specific information of the common information is accumulated in the server 200 described later is different between the model explained as the pachislot machine 1a and the model explained as the pachislot machine 1b. It is possible to do. This makes it possible not only to share the stored game information, but also to change the stored conditions, so that the interest in the stored game information can be further improved.

  In FIG. 157, as an example of common data and individual data, data related to character customization is described as an example. However, common data and individual data are not limited to this. For example, if the release condition relates to the cumulative number of times the game has been played, the game information is used as common data. If the release condition relates to the cumulative number of times the game has been shifted to the bonus game state, the game information is referred to as individual data. You can also That is, any game information that can be shared between one type of gaming machine and another type of gaming machine can be applied as common data.

  Next, data transfer between the pachislot machine 1 and the server 200 will be described with reference to FIG. Although not shown, the server 200 manages, for example, a WEB server that controls communication with the mobile terminal of the player, a player management server that manages player information, and data corresponding to the game information of each model. Configured by a data management server.

  First, if the player wants to restore the game information stored at the end of the previous game (ie, if he wants to play the game from the previous game with respect to the accumulated game information), he / she can use his / her mobile terminal browser, application, etc. To access the server 200 (player access).

  At this time, the server 200 authenticates the player with the identification information obtained when accessed, and then issues a password for restoring the game information, and the password is displayed on the display screen on the player's portable terminal. Data to be displayed is sent to the player's mobile terminal. The password is an example of restoration information for restoring accumulated game information in the pachislot 1. That is, as long as the information can be input or read on the pachislot 1 side, other information can be transmitted as restoration information.

  The player inputs the password transmitted from the server 200 and displayed on his portable terminal in the above-described password display image (password input area 116) (with password input). Thereby, in the pachi-slot 1, the player's login is completed, and the game information is restored to the data at the previous end according to the data indicated by the input password.

  On the other hand, if you are the first player to play a game with that model (including other models for which common data is set), or if you are a new player who wants to start storing game information, Is not entered (no password is entered), and a new login is performed based on the touch operation of the above-mentioned item “Record” of the unimemo menu by the player. If no operation is performed, the user is not logged in and the game information is not updated.

  When the game information is restored based on the input of the password and logged in, or after a new login, the game is started (game start), and the game information is appropriately selected according to the result of the game. (Including common data, individual data, other game result data, etc.) is updated and stored. Note that the game information updated here may include not only specific information that can be restored by inputting a password, but also general information that simply indicates the result of the game.

  Thereafter, when the game is ended (game end), the player is logged out based on the touch operation of the above-mentioned item “record and end” of the unimemo menu. The liquid crystal display device 11 displays a two-dimensional code for storing game information (that is, for storing game information recorded on the pachislot 1 side in the server 200).

  The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 of the pachi-slot machine 1 with his / her portable terminal, and based on the data included in the read two-dimensional code, the browser or application of his / her portable terminal Is used to access the server 200 (player access based on a two-dimensional code). In addition, what is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 of the pachislot 1 may be a URL or a password, for example. That is, any information that can access the server 200 may be used.

  At this time, the server 200 appropriately updates the game information (including common data, individual data, other game result data, etc.) with the data indicating the game information stored on the pachislot 1 side acquired when accessed. Accumulate. Note that the game information stored here may be only specific information that can be restored by a transmitted password.

  If the game information to be updated and stored includes common data, the server 200 also updates and stores game information of other models whose game information can be updated by the common data.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration has been described in which data is exchanged between the pachislot 1 and the server 200 by mediating a player's portable terminal between the pachislot 1 and the server 200. The configuration that enables data exchange between the server 200 and the server 200 is not limited to this. For example, when the pachislot machine 1 is capable of direct data communication with the server 200, it may be configured to directly exchange data related to game information without mediating the player's portable terminal. . In addition, for example, the pachislot 1 is incapable of data communication with the server 200, but another game device (for example, a game display device capable of displaying various information related to a game, or a game medium held by a player) Game media management that enables the game media to be managed electromagnetically without the physical game media being inserted and dispensed in the pachislot 1 by allowing data corresponding to the above to be exchanged with the pachislot 1 When data communication is possible with the device, the data may be exchanged between the pachislot machine 1 and the server 200 by mediating such other gaming device. In short, the form that enables data exchange between the pachislot machine 1 and the server 200 is not limited to the form in which data is directly delivered, but indirectly (that is, via another device). All forms of delivery are applicable.

  That is, as a gaming system including a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) and a server device (for example, server 200), a game composed of a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) and a server device (for example, server 200). It can also be a system, a gaming system (for example, pachislot 1), a server device (for example, server 200), and a player's portable terminal, or a gaming machine (for example, A gaming system including a pachislot 1), a server device (for example, the server 200), and another gaming device may be used. That is, in this embodiment, the invention as a gaming system can also be configured.

  As described so far, according to this embodiment, it is possible to provide at least the following gaming machines having the first to nineteenth configurations and the server device having the twentieth configuration.

[Amusement machines having first to fourth configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, according to the number of games between advantageous game states advantageous to the player, a music piece that can be selected from a plurality of music pieces that are played during the advantageous game state is determined. There is known one that allows a player to select a song within a range (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-423).

  However, for example, the interest in selecting music and the speed at which the game progresses vary from player to player or depending on the time of the game. A gaming machine capable of making a selection has been desired.

  The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enables music selection that matches a player's preference and situation and can improve the interest of the game. And

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following first configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot 1) that can be controlled in a special gaming state (e.g., BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player by performing a game by variably displaying multiple symbols in multiple columns,
Music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music;
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music;
Output content change means (for example, touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected by the music selection means,
The plurality of songs include specific songs,
The music output means, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first of the music) and the second part following the first part (For example, music number 2) can be output,
The output content changing means outputs so that, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means starts output from the second portion of the specific music in the special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the contents can be changed.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following second configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot 1) that can be controlled in a special gaming state (e.g., BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player by performing a game by variably displaying multiple symbols in multiple columns,
Music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music;
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music;
Output content change means (for example, touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected by the music selection means,
The plurality of songs include specific songs,
The music output means, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means,
When the special condition is satisfied, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first part of the music) and the second part (for example, the second part of the music) following the specific music Output,
If the special condition is not satisfied, only the first part of the specific music is output in the special game state,
The output content changing means is the case where the specific music is selected by the music selection means, and the specific music is in the special game state when the special condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine is characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to start the output from the second part.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following third configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot 1) that can be controlled in a special gaming state (e.g., BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player by performing a game by variably displaying multiple symbols in multiple columns,
Music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music;
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music;
Output content change means (for example, touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected by the music selection means,
The special gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued over a predetermined number of games (for example, 24 times),
The plurality of songs include specific songs,
The music output means, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first of the music) and the second part following the first part (For example, music number 2) can be output,
The first portion of the specific musical piece has a time (for example, 150 seconds) longer than a value obtained by multiplying the minimum number of times (for example, 4.1 seconds) required for one game by the predetermined number of times. Is set to
The output content changing means outputs so that, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means starts output from the second portion of the specific music in the special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the contents can be changed.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

In a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot 1) that can be controlled in a special gaming state (e.g., BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player by performing a game by variably displaying multiple symbols in multiple columns,
Music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music;
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music;
Output content change means (for example, touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected by the music selection means,
The special gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued over a predetermined number of games (for example, 24 times),
The music selection means can select a music when the special gaming state is started,
The plurality of songs include specific songs,
The music output means, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first of the music) and the second part following the first part (For example, music number 2) can be output,
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, and when a special condition is satisfied during the special game state, the output content changing means is configured so that the music output means is the second music in the specific music. A game machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to output a portion.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the fourth configuration, when the specific music is selected by the music selection unit, the output content changing unit is configured such that when the special game state is started, the music output unit is A game machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to start output from the second portion of a specific musical piece.

  In the gaming machines having the first to fourth configurations, not only the player can select a desired piece of music, but also the output content can be changed so that the selected piece of music is output from a desired location. This makes it possible to select music that matches the user's preference and situation, and improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the second configuration, the second part (for example, the second part) of the music that cannot be normally heard can be heard by performing the output content changing operation. Thereby, since the significance regarding the change of the output content of a music can be raised more, the interest regarding music selection can further be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the third configuration, when the output content changing operation is performed, it is possible to immediately hear from the second part (for example, the second part) of the music, so it is desired to digest the game as soon as possible. Even if the player has the desired taste, or the player is in such a situation, it is possible to prevent the interest related to music selection from declining and to improve the interest related to music selection. Can be made.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the fourth configuration, the output content changing operation cannot normally be performed, but when the special condition is satisfied, the output content changing operation is performed even in the middle of the special gaming state. Will be able to. Thereby, the new game nature regarding the music selection in a special game state can be added. In addition, for example, when it is possible to perform the output content change operation even when the special gaming state starts, the player who has forgotten to perform the output content change operation has an interest in music selection. It is possible to prevent the decline.

[Game machines having fifth to eighth configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, if the winning probability of a predetermined combination in a predetermined period is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the first effect control is performed, and if the probability is not less than the predetermined value, the second effect control is performed. There is known one in which a value can be estimated (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-106477).

  In the gaming machine shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-106477, since the winning probability of a predetermined role increases as the set value increases, a game is performed when the second effect control is performed. One expects to receive many benefits.

  By the way, a high set value is an advantageous state for the player side, but is a state in which it is likely to suffer a disadvantage for the game store side. Therefore, if a game store tries to secure a certain profit, it is unlikely that a high set value will always be set for all installed gaming machines.

  Therefore, if the production control is simply made different between when the set value is high and when the set value is low, if the production control that is assumed to be low is performed, the player's willingness to play is reduced. In addition, as a result, the operation of the gaming machine decreased, and there was a problem that the amusement store could not secure profit.

  The present invention has been made in view of these points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving gaming motivation while achieving an equity of profits between a player and a gaming store. To do.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following fifth configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed in multiple columns to play a game,
Setting value setting means (for example, main CPU 93) capable of setting one setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings “1” to “6”) for varying the degree of advantage of the player ,
Special state determining means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for determining whether or not to set a special state as a state in which the production is controlled based on the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
Special state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) capable of controlling to the special state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied when the special state determination means determines to set the special state;
The special state determination unit sets the special state when a specific set value (for example, setting “6”) that is relatively advantageous to the player is set by the set value setting unit. Can decide
The special state is a state in which the special effect can be executed or the special effect is easily executed,
The predetermined end condition is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 72 hours) elapses after it is determined that the special state determination means sets the special state. Machine.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following sixth configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed in multiple columns to play a game,
Setting value setting means (for example, main CPU 93) capable of setting one setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings “1” to “6”) for varying the degree of advantage of the player ,
Special state determining means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for determining whether or not to set a special state as a state in which the production is controlled based on the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
Special state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) capable of controlling to the special state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied when the special state determination means determines to set the special state;
The special state determination unit sets the special state when a specific set value (for example, setting “6”) that is relatively advantageous to the player is set by the set value setting unit. Can decide
The special state is a state in which the special effect can be executed or the special effect is easily executed,
The predetermined end condition is satisfied when the time period from when the special state determination unit determines to set the special state becomes a predetermined period (for example, 72 hours). And
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined period is set to a period during which the special state can be continued over a plurality of different business days in a game store.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following seventh configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed in multiple columns to play a game,
Setting value setting means (for example, main CPU 93) capable of setting one setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings “1” to “6”) for varying the degree of advantage of the player ,
Special state determining means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for determining whether or not to set a special state as a state in which the production is controlled based on the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
Special state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) capable of controlling to the special state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied when the special state determination means determines to set the special state;
The special state determination unit sets the special state when a specific set value (for example, setting “6”) that is relatively advantageous to the player is set by the set value setting unit. Can decide
The special state is a state in which the special effect can be executed or the special effect is easily executed,
The predetermined end condition is satisfied when the time period from when the special state determination unit determines to set the special state becomes a predetermined period (for example, 72 hours). And
The predetermined period is set to a period in which the special state can be continued across a plurality of different business days in an amusement store,
When the special state control means is controlled to the special state and the condition for determining that the special state is set by the special state determination means is satisfied, the time measurement for the predetermined period is again performed. A gaming machine characterized by starting from the beginning.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following eighth configuration can be provided.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed in multiple columns to play a game,
Setting value setting means (for example, main CPU 93) capable of setting one setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings “1” to “6”) for varying the degree of advantage of the player ,
Special state determining means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for determining whether or not to set a special state as a state in which the production is controlled based on the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
Special state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) capable of controlling to the special state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied when the special state determination means determines to set the special state;
The special state determining means is a case where a specific setting value (for example, setting “6”) having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player is set by the setting value setting means, and the specific setting When a game is performed for a specific period (for example, 1000 times) in a state where a value is set, it is possible to decide to set the special state,
The special state is a state in which the special effect can be executed or the special effect is easily executed,
The predetermined end condition is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 72 hours) elapses after it is determined that the special state determination means sets the special state. Machine.

  In the gaming machines having the fifth to eighth configurations, the player may be able to grasp the setting status of the set value during a predetermined period (for example, a plurality of business days at a game store), and when special effects are executed. Since there is a possibility that an advantageous setting value is set in the gaming machine in which the player is playing, the player plays a game with expectation. In addition, since the special state can be continued for a predetermined period (for example, extending over a plurality of business days of the amusement store), the amusement store can set the setting value with sharpness, and the appropriate profit Can be secured. In other words, it is possible to improve game motivation while achieving a balance of profits between the player and the game store.

  In addition, in the gaming machines having the sixth and seventh configurations, when it is determined to set the special state, the time until the special state is ended is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution time of special effects from being biased, and to manage the period during which the special state continues more accurately. It can be carried out.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the seventh configuration, when it is decided to set the special state, it is possible to start measuring the time until the special state is finished, and then set the special state further. When the condition to be determined is satisfied, the time measurement is started again from the beginning. That is, the time until the special state is finished is overwritten. As a result, for example, when a special state has continued beyond a predetermined period, the player may be able to more accurately grasp the setting status of the set values on a plurality of business days in the game store. Can increase motivation. In addition, if the player wants to grasp such a setting state, the player needs to visit the gaming machine store frequently, so that the operation of the gaming machine can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to play for a longer period of time while balancing the profits between the player and the game store.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the eighth configuration, when a specific set value is set and a game for a specific period is performed, the game machine is controlled to a specific state. Thus, for example, a specific set value is set once only for the game store to control to a specific state, and then a set value that is less advantageous than the specific set value is set when the player plays a game. This can prevent acts such as playing games. Therefore, even when a special state that can be continued for a predetermined period (for example, over a plurality of business days of a game store) is provided, it is possible to perform equitable presentation control for both the player and the game store.

[Game machines of ninth to sixteenth configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, a password associated with game history data is issued, and when a password issued via a touch panel is input, a message corresponding to the game history data can be displayed. (For example, refer to JP2008-131985).

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, since the input of the password is not the main content of the game, the password is input by touching the keyboard displayed on a specific screen or operating the cross key or the like. It is normal to be done.

  Therefore, it has been desired to devise a device for improving convenience related to character input such as a password.

  The present invention has been made in view of these points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve convenience related to character input.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following ninth configuration.

A gaming machine configured to display a plurality of symbols variably in a plurality of columns and to input a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation to a touch panel (for example, touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel includes
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) capable of sequentially inputting a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters);
A keyboard display area (for example, a keyboard display area 117) capable of designating a character input in the character input area, and can be displayed.
In the character input area, when a touch operation is performed on any area in the non-input area where no character is input, control can be performed so that the first character in the non-input area can be input. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following tenth configuration can be provided.

A gaming machine configured to display a plurality of symbols variably in a plurality of columns and to input a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation to a touch panel (for example, touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel includes
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) capable of sequentially inputting a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters);
A keyboard display area (for example, a keyboard display area 117) capable of designating a character input in the character input area, and can be displayed.
In the character input area,
When a touch operation is performed on any area in the non-input area where no character is input, control can be performed so that input can be performed from the first character in the non-input area.
When a touch operation is performed on an input area in which characters are input, only the character corresponding to the location where the touch operation is performed can be controlled to be changeable. Gaming machine.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following eleventh configuration can be provided.

A gaming machine configured to display a plurality of symbols variably in a plurality of columns and to input a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation to a touch panel (for example, touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel includes
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) capable of sequentially inputting a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters);
A keyboard display area (for example, a keyboard display area 117) capable of designating characters to be input to the character input area;
And a determination operation input area (for example, a determination operation input area in the intention operation input area 118) in which a player's determination operation can be input can be displayed.
The character string is always composed of the predetermined number of characters regardless of the amount of information,
In the character input area, when a touch operation is performed on any area in the non-input area where no character is input, control can be performed so that the first character in the non-input area can be input. age,
In the determination operation input area, when the predetermined number of characters are not input in the character input area, the determination operation is not controlled to be in an inputable state.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following twelfth configuration can be provided.

A game is performed by variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a password relating to the production can be input by an input operation to the touch panel (for example, the touch input unit 31a), and for each player using the password. In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) configured to be able to exchange data corresponding to game information corresponding to the game status of the game with a server (for example, server 200),
The touch panel includes
A password input area (for example, password input area 116) capable of sequentially inputting a password of a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters);
A keyboard display area (for example, a keyboard display area 117) capable of designating characters input in the password input area, and can be displayed;
In the password input area, when a touch operation is performed on any area in the non-input area where no characters are input, it can be controlled so that the first character in the non-input area can be input. age,
The game information is
Specific information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server as specific information in the model of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by including common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server as common information between a model of the gaming machine and a model different from the gaming machine model.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following thirteenth configuration can be provided.

A gaming machine configured to display a plurality of symbols variably in a plurality of columns and to input a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation to a touch panel (for example, touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel includes
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) capable of sequentially inputting a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters);
A keyboard display area (for example, a keyboard display area 117) capable of designating a character input in the character input area, and can be displayed.
In the character input area,
When the keyboard display area is designated by the player, the first area of the non-input area where no character is input in the character input area is displayed in the first display mode,
When the character input area is designated by a player, the leading area of the non-input area is displayed in a second display mode.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following fourteenth configuration can be provided.

A gaming machine configured to display a plurality of symbols variably in a plurality of columns and to input a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation to a touch panel (for example, touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel includes
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) capable of sequentially inputting a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters);
A keyboard display area (for example, a keyboard display area 117) capable of designating a character input in the character input area, and can be displayed.
In the character input area,
When the keyboard display area is designated by the player, the first area of the non-input area where no character is input in the character input area is displayed in the first display mode,
When the character input area is designated by the player, the first area of the non-input area is displayed in the second display mode,
When a touch operation is performed on an input area in which characters are input, only the character corresponding to the location where the touch operation is performed can be controlled to be changeable. Gaming machine.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifteenth configuration.

A gaming machine configured to display a plurality of symbols variably in a plurality of columns and to input a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation to a touch panel (for example, touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel includes
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) capable of sequentially inputting a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters);
A keyboard display area (for example, a keyboard display area 117) capable of designating characters to be input to the character input area;
And a determination operation input area (for example, a determination operation input area in the intention operation input area 118) in which a player's determination operation can be input can be displayed.
The character string is always composed of the predetermined number of characters regardless of the amount of information,
In the character input area,
When the keyboard display area is designated by the player, the first area of the non-input area where no character is input in the character input area is displayed in the first display mode,
When the character input area is designated by the player, the first area of the non-input area is displayed in the second display mode,
In the determination operation input area, when the predetermined number of characters are not input in the character input area, the determination operation is not controlled to be in an inputable state.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following sixteenth configuration can be provided.

A game is performed by variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a password relating to the production can be input by an input operation to the touch panel (for example, the touch input unit 31a), and for each player using the password. In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) configured to be able to exchange data corresponding to game information corresponding to the game status of the game with a server (for example, server 200),
The touch panel includes
A password input area (for example, password input area 116) capable of sequentially inputting a password of a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters);
A keyboard display area (for example, a keyboard display area 117) capable of designating characters input in the password input area, and can be displayed;
In the password input area,
When the keyboard display area is designated by the player, the first area of the non-input area where no characters are input in the password input area is displayed in the first display mode,
When the password input area is designated by the player, the first area of the non-input area is displayed in the second display mode,
The game information is
Specific information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server as specific information in the model of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by including common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server as common information between a model of the gaming machine and a model different from the gaming machine model.

  In the ninth to twelfth configuration gaming machines, when the player tries to input a character string (for example, a password) in the middle of input, the player moves the cursor to the first position in the non-input area. The input can be resumed as soon as the non-input area is touched without performing a strict touch operation on the head of the non-input area. Thereby, it is possible to make a device that makes it difficult for the player to feel annoyance regarding the character input, and it is possible to improve the convenience related to the character input.

  Further, in the gaming machines of the thirteenth to sixteenth configurations, the display mode is changed depending on whether characters or symbols can be input immediately while showing the leading area in the non-input area. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to devise to display the input state of a character string (for example, a password) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and it is possible to improve the convenience regarding character input.

  Further, in the gaming machines having the tenth and fourteenth configurations, when the player wants to change the character or symbol of the input character string (for example, password), the player touches the portion where the character or symbol to be changed is displayed. As long as you re-enter characters, symbols, etc., you can immediately change your entry. Thus, for example, when there is a need to change the input content, such as when there is an error in the input content of a character string (for example, a password), the player is made difficult to feel annoyance. It is possible to improve convenience for character input.

  In addition, in the gaming machines of the eleventh and fifteenth configurations, for example, when a player forgets one character to be input, there is an error in the input content of the character string (for example, password). Can be immediately recognized by the player, preventing the player from being confused and consuming unnecessary time and improving the convenience of character input.

  In addition, in the gaming machines of the twelfth and sixteenth configurations, for example, when a plurality of types of gaming machines having different models are installed in a gaming store at the same time, the player can enjoy the accumulation of gaming information while Since the model for performing the game can be changed, the interest in the stored game information can be further improved without getting tired of the game itself. Also, for example, when multiple types of gaming machines of different models are installed in a game store at different times, the gaming information accumulated in the previously installed model is not wasted and installed later. Since the game information can be continuously stored even in the model, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the stored game information and to increase the brand power of the gaming machine having such a relationship. In other words, it is possible to further improve the interest with respect to password input related to accumulation of game information.

[Game Machines of 17th to 19th Configuration and Server Device of 20th Configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, an information code including game history information indicating a player's game result and player identification information is generated and displayed, and the player shoots it with a camera such as a mobile phone. There has been known one that allows access to a server and allows game result related information to be accumulated on the server side (see, for example, JP 2009-125220 A).

  However, since the game information accumulated in this way is exclusively information that depends on the model of the gaming machine, for example, if the model disappears from the amusement shop due to replacement of the model, etc. There is a problem that the game information cannot be updated and the interest in the accumulated game information is lost.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, and it aims at providing the game machine and server apparatus which can further improve the interest with respect to the game information accumulate | stored.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following seventeenth configuration can be provided.

A game is played by variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and data corresponding to game information corresponding to the game situation of each player can be exchanged with a server (for example, server 200). In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1),
The game information is
Specific information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server as specific information in the model of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by including common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server as common information between a model of the gaming machine and a model different from the gaming machine model.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the seventeenth configuration is provided with an effect changing means capable of changing an effect performed on a model of the gaming machine according to the unique information and the common information.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following eighteenth configuration can be provided.

A game is played by variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and data corresponding to game information corresponding to the game situation of each player can be exchanged with a server (for example, server 200). In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1),
The game information is
Specific information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server as specific information in the model of the gaming machine,
Common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server, as common information between different models of the gaming machine model and the gaming machine model,
The common information is related to the character used in common between the character used for the effect performed in the model of the gaming machine and the character used for the effect performed in a model different from the model of the gaming machine. A game machine including character-related information to be played.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the eighteenth configuration is provided with a display mode changing means capable of changing a display mode of a character used for an effect performed in a model of the gaming machine based on the character related information. To play.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine having the following nineteenth configuration can be provided.

A game is played by variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and data corresponding to game information corresponding to the game situation of each player can be exchanged with a server (for example, server 200). In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1),
The game information is
Specific information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server as specific information in the model of the gaming machine,
Common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server, as common information between different models of the gaming machine model and the gaming machine model,
The common information includes specific information (for example, common data regarding a specific costume, common data regarding a specific item),
The gaming machine characterized in that the condition for storing the specific information in the server can be different between a model of the gaming machine and a model different from the gaming machine model.

  Moreover, in order to achieve the said objective, according to the server apparatus of this embodiment, the server apparatus of the following 20th structure can be provided.

For a plurality of types of gaming machines of different models (for example, pachislot 1a and pachislot 1b), it is possible to acquire and store game information according to the game situation for each player, and to be accumulated by access from the player. In the server device (for example, the server 200) configured to be able to send restoration information for restoring the gaming information in the gaming machine,
The game information is
Unique information (for example, individual data) stored as unique information in one type of gaming machine,
Including common information (for example, common data) accumulated as common information among multiple types of gaming machines,
When the game information is restored in the one type of gaming machine, the restoration information including the specific information corresponding to the one type of gaming machine and the common information is transmitted. apparatus.

  In the server device of the twentieth configuration, the common information is used for a character used for an effect performed on the one type of gaming machine and an effect performed on a game machine of a model different from the one model. A server device comprising character related information related to a character used in common with a character to be used.

  In the server device of the twentieth configuration, the common information includes specific information, and the condition for storing the specific information is that the gaming machine of the one model is different from the gaming machine of the one model. A server device characterized in that it can be under different conditions.

  In the gaming machines having the seventeenth to nineteenth configurations and the server device having the twentieth configuration, for example, when a plurality of types of gaming machines having different models are installed in a gaming store at the same time, Since the game model can be changed while enjoying the accumulation of the game, the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved without getting tired of the game itself. Also, for example, when multiple types of gaming machines of different models are installed in a game store at different times, the gaming information accumulated in the previously installed model is not wasted and installed later. Since the game information can be continuously stored even in the model, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the stored game information and to increase the brand power of the gaming machine having such a relationship.

  In the 18th configuration gaming machine and the 20th configuration server apparatus, the common information includes characters used for effects performed in one type of gaming machine and other types of gaming machines. Character-related information related to commonly used characters can be included with characters used for production, and the character display mode can be changed by this character-related information. Thereby, since the contents of the production can be changed according to the outcome of the game across a plurality of models, the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved. The same applies to the gaming machine of the seventeenth configuration.

  Further, in the gaming machine with the nineteenth configuration and the server device with the twentieth configuration, the condition for storing the specific information of the common information in the server device is that one type of gaming machine and another type of gaming machine It is possible to have different conditions between This makes it possible not only to share the stored game information, but also to change the stored conditions, so that the interest in the stored game information can be further improved.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment other than what was mentioned above, the game machine which has the other 1st-7th effect shown below can be provided.

[Other first effects]
In the present embodiment, pull-back is performed in the ART pull-back process by performing the above-described ART processing (see FIG. 105), ART pull-back process (FIG. 107), and display command reception process (see FIG. 116). After that, in a game that is played until a predetermined winning number for notifying the stop order is won, as long as the stop operation is performed by forward pressing (“left middle right” and “left and right middle”), the sub control circuit 101 The CPU 102 does not subtract the value of the ART game number counter (see S614 in FIG. 107, S808 in FIG. 116, and S584 and S585 in FIG. 105). Even in a game in which the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted, the sub CPU 102 performs an extra game number lottery (S583 during ART processing shown in FIG. 105) for each game.
In addition, in a game that is performed until a predetermined winning number for notifying the stop order is won after the pulling is performed in the ART pulling back process (hereinafter, referred to as “between navigations”), other than forward pressing When the stop operation is performed in the stop order, the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game from the game next to the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push (see FIG. 107, S614, S808 in FIG. 116, and S584 and S585 in FIG. 105).

  Therefore, when the stop operation is not performed by forward pressing between navigations, the value of the ART game number counter becomes “0” earlier than when the stop operation is performed by forward pressing. Therefore, the number of extra game number lotteries is reduced. That is, when the stop operation is not performed in the predetermined stop order between the navigations, the opportunity for adding the number of games to the ART game number counter is reduced compared to the case where the stop operation is performed in the predetermined stop order. it can. Therefore, a penalty can be generated when a stop operation is not performed between navigations in a predetermined stop order.

  Regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the predetermined stop order between the navigations, “50” is set in the ART game number counter (see S612 in FIG. 107). That is, the number of staying games in the second ART is guaranteed at least “50”. Therefore, an excessive penalty is not imposed on a player who has unintentionally performed a stop operation in a stop order different from the forward press. For this reason, it can suppress that the interest of a game falls.

  In this embodiment, in a game played between navigations, when a stop operation is performed in a stop order other than forward press, the game after the game in which the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than forward press The aspect in which the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game has been described. However, instead of this, the value of the ART game number counter may be subtracted “1” for each game from the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward press. In this case, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART game number counter is added between S809 and S810 in the display command reception process (see FIG. 116), similar to S585 in the ART processing (see FIG. 105). .

[Other second effects]
Further, in the present embodiment, when a stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order, and an assist state different from the lottery assist state occurs, that is, the sub gaming state is in a pseudo bonus, When the bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77, set to on in S819 of the penalty determination process shown in FIG. 117) is on, the reel lamp 22 in the lamp effect sequence data is displayed in S917 of the lamp control task (see FIG. 121). The lamp pattern data is changed to a full lighting pattern that lights without blinking. For this reason, the person who looks at the pachi-slot 1 can recognize that the stop operation has been performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order. In other words, in the game during the first ART (pseudo bonus), a person who watches the pachislot 1 has a stop order different from the notified stop order when the reel lamp 22 is lit without blinking when the display command is received. It is possible to recognize that the stop operation has been performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the mode in which the sub CPU 102 changes the lamp pattern data related to the reel lamp 22 to the full lighting pattern has been described. However, the change mode of the lamp data related to the reel lamp 22 is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set within a range that can be distinguished from the case of lighting with the lamp pattern data before the change. For example, the sub CPU 102 may change the lamp pattern data of the reel lamp 22 to an all-off pattern that is turned off without being turned on. The lamp pattern data related to the change is not limited to the lamp pattern data related to the reel lamp 22 when the display command is received (third stop operation is off). For example, the lamp pattern data related to the headlamp 21 may be changed. Further, for example, the lamp pattern data for all effects in the first ART may be changed not only when the display command is received.

[Other third effects]
In the present embodiment, in the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 determines the lamp state information when the accessory pattern data instructed to operate the accessory control board 78 is the interlocking accessory pattern data. Then, an operation start request or an operation end request is added (entry) to the sound reproduction state information and the animation reproduction state information (S907). Further, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information in the lamp control task (see FIG. 121), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the effect related to the interlocking lamp pattern data, that is, the head with the interlocking lamp pattern data. The LED control board 72 is instructed to turn on the lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 and so on (S919). Further, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound playback state information in the sound control task (see FIG. 122), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the production related to the interlocking sound pattern data, that is, the interlocking sound pattern data The sound board 71 is instructed to output the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R or to stop (end) the output (S936). In addition, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation playback state information in the animation control task (see FIG. 123), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the effect related to the linked animation pattern data, that is, the linked animation pattern data. The liquid crystal display device 11 is instructed to display such video or to stop (end) video display (S946). Therefore, image effects (effects by displaying images on the liquid crystal display device 11), sound effects (effects by outputting effect sounds from the speakers 20L and 20R), lamp effects (headlamp 21 and reel lamp 22 etc. are lit). The start timing and the end timing of the effect effect (effect by the rotating accessory 123) can be synchronized.

  When synchronizing the start timing and end timing of all image effects, sound effects, lamp effects, and accessory effects, all animation pattern data is linked animation pattern data, and all sound pattern data is linked sound pattern data. All the lamp pattern data may be linked lamp pattern data, and all the accessory pattern data may be linked character pattern data.

[Other fourth effects]
In this embodiment, in the sound control task (see FIG. 122), the sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71 is the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence related to the effect for displaying the bonus confirmation screen. The sub CPU 102 adds marker data defined in the sound effect sequence to the sound reproduction state information every predetermined time (S938). In addition, in the animation control task (see FIG. 123), the sub CPU 102 acquires sound reproduction state information stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 when the set animation effect sequence data is a bonus fixed effect sequence. (S948). Then, when the acquired sound reproduction state information includes marker data, the sub CPU 102 reproduces the divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data (displays it on the liquid crystal display device 11). For this reason, even when the image effect and the sound effect are complicated effects, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a synchronization shift between the image effect and the sound effect in the middle of the effect.

  Note that the length of the divided moving image data (the length of the moving image) can be arbitrarily set. For example, as described above, when the divided moving image data 0 to 4 are created by dividing the moving image data of 5 seconds into five, the length of the first divided moving image data 0 is 0.5 seconds, and the divided moving image data that follows The length of 1 may be set to 1.5 seconds, and the length of the divided moving image data 2 may be set to 2 seconds. In addition, the number of divided moving image data generated by dividing from a series of moving image data can be arbitrarily set. For example, for example, the divided moving image data may be generated by dividing the moving image data of 5 seconds into 10 every 0.5 seconds. Further, the number of marker data and the timing of adding marker data in the sound control task (see FIG. 122) to the sound playback state information are set so as to correspond to the number and length of the generated divided moving image data.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a mode has been described in which the image effect and the sound effect using the marker data described above are synchronized (hereinafter referred to as marker data linkage) during the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and marker data linkage may be performed during other effects.

  In the present embodiment, in the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), the synchronization of effects by adding an operation start request or an operation end request to the sound playback state information, animation playback state information, and lamp state information, and marker data The aspect which performs both interlocking | linkage was demonstrated. However, instead of this, only one of them may be performed. For example, when only marker data linkage is performed, when marker data corresponding to the first divided moving image data is set, and the marker data is instructed to the sound board 71 for the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence, You may make it add to sound reproduction status information. Then, when the acquired sound reproduction state information includes marker data corresponding to the first divided moving image data, the sub CPU 102 may reproduce the first divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data. In this way, the start timing of the sound effect and the image effect can be synchronized by the marker data interlocking.

[Other fifth effects]
In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub CPU 102 performs OFF edge detection to detect selection when the finger is released from the touch input unit 31a. Therefore, even when a player or the like touches a finger outside the position corresponding to the desired item in the touch input unit 31a when selecting an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the desired result can be obtained without releasing the finger. If the finger is moved to a position corresponding to the item to be released and then released, the sub CPU 102 can detect the item desired by the player or the like as the selected item.

  In the present embodiment, the mode in which the sub CPU 102 executes the OFF edge when the screen related to the mobile terminal cooperation function (see FIGS. 135 to 141) is displayed on the sub screen 113 has been described. . However, the trigger for the sub CPU 102 to execute the OFF edge can be arbitrarily set. For example, OFF edge execution may be performed only when a predetermined screen is displayed on the sub screen 113, and ON edge execution may be performed at other times. For example, compared to the guide menu screen (see FIG. 135) and the unimemo menu screen (see FIG. 138), relatively small button-like menu items (password entry menus “0” to “9” and “A” to “A” Only when the password input menu screen (FIG. 139) on which “F” is displayed is displayed, the sub CPU 102 may execute OFF edge execution.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 may execute OFF edge execution only for a predetermined menu item, and may perform ON edge execution for other menu items. For example, OFF edge execution is performed only for “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” of the password input menu, which are relatively small button-like menu items on the password input menu screen (FIG. 139). On the menu items “decide”, “delete”, “return to game”, and “return”, ON edge execution may be performed.

  Further, whether or not to execute OFF edge may be set according to the type of screen displayed on the sub screen 113. For example, when the screen related to the mobile terminal cooperation function is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, OFF edge execution is performed, and when the screen related to the effect during the game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, ON edge execution is performed. You may go.

[Other sixth effects]
In this embodiment, when the operation command continuous counter exceeds 288000 in S983 of the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125), the sub CPU 102 stores an error code “TP LONG ON” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Record. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for 3 minutes. Then, after displaying the warning screen on the main screen 111, the sub CPU 102 displays the screen displayed before the warning screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 after three minutes have elapsed, thereby enabling the game to be resumed. The error code recorded in the sub RAM 103 can be referred to on the error information history screen (see FIG. 130) displayed on the main screen 111 in the error information history processing (S1009) in the hall menu processing (see FIG. 129). . Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the output of the signal indicating that the touch input unit 31a is operated has continued beyond a predetermined time, and it is possible to suppress the lengthening of the period during which the game is disabled.

  Note that the threshold value (288000 in this embodiment) of the operation command continuous counter in the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125) can be arbitrarily set. When displaying a warning or the like when the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 2 hours, the threshold value of the operation command continuous counter is set to 144000. Good. Further, when the touch sensor relay board 73 transmits data every 100 msec and the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 4 hours. When displaying a warning or the like, the threshold value of the operation command continuous counter may be set to 144000.

[Other seventh effects]
In the present embodiment, in the maintenance process (see FIG. 131), the sub CPU 102 displays the grid line G (see FIGS. 132 and 134) on the touch panel maintenance screen 115. Further, when the finger moves while maintaining a state in which the finger touches the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 is arranged at a position corresponding to a position where the finger of the grid line G is always touching the touch input unit 31a. As described above, the display position of the grid line G is changed in synchronization with the movement of the finger. For this reason, it is possible to recognize whether or not the position of the intersection of the grid lines G displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a are deviated. It can be confirmed whether or not the position where the finger touches the portion 31a is accurately recognized. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the operation state of the touch input unit 31a and the mounting position are deviated.

  In the present embodiment, when the touch panel maintenance screen 115 is displayed, the aspect in which the grid line G is displayed so that the intersection is arranged at the initial position even when the finger is not touching the touch input unit 31a has been described. However, instead of this, the grid line G may be displayed on the touch panel maintenance screen 115 only when it is detected that a finger touches the touch input unit 31a.

  In the present embodiment, when the finger is released from the touch input unit 31a after changing the display position of the grid line G, the sub CPU 102 determines that the intersection of the grid lines G is arranged at the initial position described above. The aspect which changes the display position of G was demonstrated. However, instead of this, in the same case, the sub CPU 102 arranges the intersection of the grid lines G at a position where the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a, that is, a position corresponding to the position where the finger was last touched. The state may be maintained.

[Other expandability of gaming machine according to this embodiment]
In the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (that is, the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 13, or the credited medal is the MAX bet button 14 or the 1 bet button 15). In the case where a game is started by the operation of inserting and the medals are paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 43 is driven and the medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 18, or credit However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the present invention is applied to all modes in which a game medium required for a game is inserted by a player, a game is performed based on the game medium, and a privilege is granted (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the game result. be able to. That is, not only the form in which a game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's action and the game medium is paid out, but also the main control circuit 91 (main control board 41) itself is a game medium held by the player. The game may be managed electromagnetically to enable a game without medals. In addition, the game media management apparatus that manages the game media that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 91 (main control board 41) may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player. .

  In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. The game medium lending operation (that is, the operation for providing the necessary game medium when the player performs the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role relating to the payout of the game medium ( A game medium payout operation (that is, an operation for acquiring a game medium necessary for paying out a game medium to the player) or a game medium to be used for a game when the combination is established) It may be possible to perform an electromagnetic recording operation. The game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front surface of the pachislot 1 based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the held game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to direct operation, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the game media handling device and an external device. It is desirable that the player has a performance that cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media unless it is via the external connection terminal board.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board. Media (for example, IC card) insertion port, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., external connection on the game media handling device side A terminal plate may be provided (both not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits the valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is ended, the game media management device transmits the number of game media to the game media handling device by operating any of the return operation means. The medium handling device discharges the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the number of game media is transmitted, the game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on the gaming medium recorded on another table.

  In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game media handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game media handling device side, and the game media possessed by the player It is good also as dividing and processing. In addition to discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be discharged or stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling apparatus may be able to insert a member recording medium of a game store and store it in the member recording medium so that it can be replayed at a later date.

  In addition, in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the game medium or the valuable data communication with respect to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). Also good. At that time, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device.

  As described above, the game medium management device may be one that allows games only without medals, or a game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's action, and the game medium is It may be possible to play a game in a payout form, a form that allows a game without medals, or both forms. In this case, the game medium management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 46 and the hopper device 43 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main control board 41). Based on the transmission of the control result, adopt a method that enables control to record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method. You can also.

  Further, in the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachislot machine 1 is described. However, a game medium management device is similarly provided in a slot machine using a game ball or an enclosed game machine so that a player's game Media can also be managed.

  In this way, by providing the above-described game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of devices inside the gaming machine and to reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine as compared with the case where the gaming medium is physically provided for gaming. In addition, the player can be prevented from directly touching the game medium, the gaming environment can be improved, and noise can be reduced. Also, it is possible to prevent illegal acts through game media and game media slot and payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

<Modification>
In the above embodiment, a pachislot machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine or a slot machine called “pachinko”. Here, a configuration example of a pachinko is described.

[Configuration of pachinko machines]
First, the configuration of the pachinko will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 163. FIG. 159 is a perspective view showing the external configuration of a pachinko in a modified example. FIG. 160 is an external front view of a pachinko according to a modification. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view showing a configuration of a pachinko in a modified example. FIG. 162 is a front view of a pachinko game board according to a modification.

  As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the pachinko 210 includes a glass door 211, a wooden frame 212, a base door 213, a game board 214, a dish unit 220, a liquid crystal display device 232 for displaying an image, and a launching device for launching a game ball. 330, a payout unit 700, a substrate unit 750, and the like.

  The glass door 211 is attached so that it can be opened and closed with respect to the base door 213. In addition, an opening 211a is formed at the center of the glass door 211, and a protective glass 219 having light permeability is attached to the opening 211a. The protective glass 219 is disposed so that the back surface thereof faces the front surface of the game board 214 in a state where the glass door 211 is closed.

  A lamp 332 is provided on the upper portion of the glass door 211. The lamp 332 has an LED (Light Emitting Diode) group. The lamp 332 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 400 and lights up in a predetermined pattern to produce a game.

  In addition, a touch input unit (touch panel) 360 a using the touch sensor module 360 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front of the protective glass 219. Since the configuration of the touch sensor module 360 is the same as that of the touch sensor module 31 in the above-described pachislot 1, the description thereof is omitted.

  The dish unit 220 is a unit body in which the upper dish 221 and the lower dish 222 are integrated, and is attached to the lower part of the glass door 211 at the base door 213. Further, the lower plate 222 is disposed below the upper plate 221. The upper plate 221 and the lower plate 222 are formed with payout ports 221a and 222a for renting out game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), respectively. When a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged to the upper plate 221 and the lower plate 222 through the payout ports 221a and 222a, respectively. In particular, the upper plate 221 has a game area 215 to be described later. A game ball for firing is stored.

  The launching device 330 is attached to the lower right position of the base door 213 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachinko 210. The launching device 330 includes a launching handle 226 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 227 that fits in the space on the lower right side of the dish unit 220. The firing handle 226 is provided on the front side of the panel body 227. A driving device for launching a game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 227.

  The dish unit 220 and the launching device 330 are attached to the base door 213, and the panel body 227 is provided integrally with the lower right portion of the dish unit 220. Then, the pachinko game is advanced by operating the launch handle 226 by the player.

  The game board 214 is disposed so as to be located on the back surface of the protective glass 219 and on the front surface side of the base door 213. Further, a spacer 231, a liquid crystal display device 232, and the like are disposed on the back side of the game board 214. Further, a payout unit 700 and a substrate unit 750 are disposed on the back side of the base door 213. In addition, a speaker 246 is disposed below the lower plate 222. The speaker 246 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 400 and outputs a predetermined effect sound to produce a game.

  The game board 214 is entirely formed of a substantially plate-like resin material having light permeability. Examples of the resin material having optical transparency include various resin materials such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin. In addition, the game board 214 has a game area 215 in which a game ball launched by the launching device 330 can roll down, and the game area 215 is provided on the front side of the game board. The game area 215 is an area surrounded by the guide rail 230 (specifically, an outer rail 230a shown in FIG. 162 described later), and is an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a plurality of game nails 218 are provided in the game area 214 of the game board 214 by being driven into the game board 214. Note that the configuration of the game board 214 shown in FIG. 162 is one configuration example of a game board including a game area in which a game ball can roll, and is not limited thereto.

  The liquid crystal display device 232 is disposed on the back side (back side) of the game board 214. In other words, the liquid crystal display device 232 is disposed behind the game board 214 formed of a material having optical transparency. The liquid crystal display device 232 has a display area 232a that enables display of an image relating to a game. The display area 232a is arranged so as to overlap all or part of the back surface of the game board 214.

  In other words, the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 is arranged on the back side of the game board 214 so as to overlap at least the whole or part of the game area 215 of the game board 214. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 232 is disposed on the back side of the game board 214 so that the display area 232a overlaps with all or part of the game area 215 and all or part of the game area outer area 216. . In the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232, various images such as an effect identification symbol, an effect image, and an ornamental decoration image are displayed. In this modification, a region facing the touch input unit 360a of the display region 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 in the front-rear direction may be referred to as a sub screen 232c, and the other region may be referred to as a main screen 232b.

  The spacer 231 is disposed between the back (rear side) of the game board 214 and the front (front side) of the liquid crystal display device 232, and defines a space serving as a flow path for the game ball rolling on the game board 214. To do. In addition, an LED unit 253 (see FIG. 162) is provided below the spacer 231. The spacer 231 is made of a light transmissive material. In this example, the spacer 231 is formed of a light-transmitting material. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a part of the spacer 231 is formed of a light-transmitting material. May be. Further, the spacer 231 may be formed of a material that does not have optical transparency.

  The firing handle 226 is rotatable, and a firing solenoid (not shown) as a driving device is provided on the back side of the firing handle 226. Further, a touch sensor (not shown) is provided on the peripheral edge of the firing handle 226. Furthermore, a firing volume (not shown) is provided inside the firing handle 226 to change the electric power supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown) by changing the resistance value according to the rotation amount of the firing handle 226.

  When the player touches a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the peripheral edge of the firing handle 226, it is detected that the firing handle 226 is gripped by the player. When the firing handle 226 is gripped by the player and is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side (player side), the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) changes according to the rotation angle. Then, electric power corresponding to the resistance value at this time is supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 221 are sequentially launched into the game area 215 of the game board 214 to advance the game. When a firing stop button (not shown) is pressed, the game ball is stopped firing even when the firing handle 226 is held and rotated.

  A decorative member in which three general winning holes 256a, 256b, and 256c are formed is disposed in the lower left area in the game board 214, and a portion of the decorative member that faces the LED unit 253 is transparent. Yes. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162, the LED unit 253 is visible from the lower left area of the game board 214. The LED unit 253 includes a special symbol display device, a normal symbol display device 233, a first special symbol hold display LED 234a, 234b, a second special symbol hold display LED 234c, 234d, a normal symbol hold display LED 250a, 250b, etc. Reference) is provided.

  In this example, the special symbol display device is constituted by 16 LEDs. These 16 LEDs are divided into two groups of 8 LEDs, and details will be described later, but one group performs a variable display in response to a start winning at the first start port 225. Yes, the other group performs variable display triggered by a start winning at the second start port 244. For convenience of explanation, in the following description, one LED group is a first special symbol display device 235a (see FIG. 163 described later), and the other LED group is a second special symbol display device 235b (see FIG. 163 described later). Called.

  The LEDs of the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b perform variable display that repeatedly turns on and off in units of groups when a predetermined special symbol variable display start condition is satisfied. Then, the display pattern formed by turning on / off the eight LEDs is stopped and displayed as a special symbol (also referred to as an identification symbol). When the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is in a specific stop display mode, the gaming state shifts from a normal gaming state to a winning gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. In this win game state, as will be described later, the shutter 240 (see FIG. 162) is controlled to be in the open state, and the big winning opening 239 (see FIG. 162) is in a state where it can accept the game ball. It becomes.

  In other words, the game in which the big winning opening 239 is opened is a winning game. In this example, two types of winning games, a big hit game and a small hit game, are prepared. In addition, it is a big hit that the special symbol becomes a stop display mode in which it shifts to the big hit gaming state, and a special symbol becomes a stop display mode in which the special symbol goes to the small hit gaming state.

  The difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described later. In the case of the big hit, there is a high possibility that a lot of balls can be obtained. On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, the gaming state is maintained. As described above, a game in which a special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and the game state is shifted or maintained according to the result is referred to as a “special symbol game”.

  A normal symbol display device 233 is provided below the special symbol display device. The normal symbol display device 233 is composed of two display lamps, and the normal symbols are variably displayed by alternately turning on and off these display lamps. A game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed and then stopped is displayed, and a game in which the open / closed state of the normal electric accessory 248 (see FIG. 162) differs depending on the result is referred to as a “normal symbol game”.

  Below the normal symbol display device 233, normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b are provided. The normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b display the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the normal symbols that are held by turning on, turning off, or blinking (so-called “hold number”, “hold number related to normal symbols”).

  Specifically, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is held once, the normal symbol hold display LED 250a is turned on, and the normal symbol hold display LED 250b is turned off. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is held twice, the normal symbol hold display LED 250a is turned on, and the normal symbol hold display LED 250b is turned on. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is held three times, the normal symbol hold display LED 250a blinks and the normal symbol hold display LED 250b lights. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is held four times, the normal symbol hold display LED 250a blinks and the normal symbol hold display LED 250b blinks.

  Below the normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b, first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a and 234b and second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c and 234d are provided. The first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a and 234b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c and 234d indicate the number of executions of the variable symbol display that is held by turning on, turning off, or blinking (so-called “hold number”, “special symbols”). Display the number of pending items "). The display mode of the number of reserved symbols related to special symbols by the first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a and 234b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c and 234d is the same as the display mode of the number of held normal symbols by the normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b. is there.

  On the side of the normal symbol display device 233, a hit notification LED (not shown) that lights up regardless of whether a big hit or a small hit is provided. In this example, since the number of rounds is constant, an LED for displaying the number of rounds is not provided. Therefore, on the display of the hit notification LED controlled by the main control circuit 260 (see FIG. 163 described later), there is no difference in notification of the big hit and the small hit. In addition, as described later, the opening / closing pattern of the shutter 240 is also selected from the same between the large hit and the small hit, and the sub control circuit 400 (see FIG. 163 described later). The effects produced by the liquid crystal display device 232, the lamp 332, the speaker 246, and a rotating accessory 371 described later are also the same. For this reason, the player cannot discriminate them visually even between the sudden big hit and the small hit.

  Further, in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 arranged on the back side (back side) of the game board 214, the display is performed by the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b (see FIG. 146 described later). The effect image related to the special symbol to be displayed is displayed.

  For example, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 is composed of numbers except for specific cases. Identification symbols (which are also identification information for effects), for example, numbers such as “1-8” are variably displayed. In addition, for example, the special symbols that have been variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b are stopped and displayed, and the identification symbols for presentation are also displayed on the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232. Is stopped.

  Further, in the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player can grasp that it is a win. The effect image is displayed in the display area 232 a of the liquid crystal display device 232. Specifically, in either one of the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a big hit that can be obtained by many balls. In such a case, the combination of effect identification symbols displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 is stopped in a state where all the same symbols are arranged in a specific display mode (for example, a plurality of symbol rows). In addition, the effect image for the big hit is displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232. In the case of hits where it is difficult to obtain a lot of balls (small hits, 15 hits, big hits, 16 hits, big hits), an effect image that allows the player to grasp that is a win is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 232. It is not necessary to display in the area 232a.

  As shown in FIG. 162, on the game board 214 of the pachinko 210, the guide rail 230 (230a and 230b), the stage 255, the first starting port 225, the second starting port 244, the passing gate 254, the shutter 240, the big prize. The game members such as the mouth 239, the general winning mouths 256a, 256b, 256c, 256d, and the ordinary electric accessory 248 are provided.

  A substantially inverted L-shaped stage 255 is provided on the top of the game board 214. A guide rail 230 is provided so as to surround the game area 215.

  The guide rail 230 includes an outer rail 230a that partitions (defines) the game area 215, and an inner rail 230b disposed inside the outer rail 230a. The game balls launched by the launching device 330 are guided by guide rails 230 provided on the game board 214 and moved to the upper part of the game board 214, and then provided on the plurality of game nails 218 and the game board 214. Due to the collision with the stage 255 or the like, it flows down toward the lower side of the game board 214 while changing its traveling direction. Specifically, the game ball flow down system is a system that flows down the left side of the stage 255 (so-called left-handed), and the launch handle 226 is rotated to the right to the maximum, and the game ball is driven into the right side of the stage 255 There is a system that flows down the right side of the stage 255 (so-called right-handed).

  A first start port 225 is provided below the stage 255 and below the center of the game board 214. A passage gate 254 is provided on the upper right side of the stage 255, and a second start port 244 is provided below the passage gate 254. An ordinary electric accessory 248 is provided at the second start port 244. The ordinary electric accessory 248 includes a tongue-like member 248 a that projects and retracts in the front-rear direction with respect to the plate surface of the game board 214. In this example, when the tongue-like member 248a protrudes, the game ball riding on the tongue-like member 248a wins the second starting port 244, and when the tongue-like member 248a is retracted, the game ball is second. The start opening 244 is configured not to win a prize.

  When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the predetermined symbol on the normal symbol display device 233 (see FIG. 163 described later), the tongue-like member 248a of the ordinary electric accessory 248 is in the protruding state from the retracted state for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for a game ball to enter the second start port 244. The ordinary electric accessory 248 is not limited to the one that projects and retracts the tongue-like member 248a, and may be one that opens and closes a pair of blade members (so-called electric tulip), for example.

  In addition, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the stage 255, the game nail 218 is driven into a path along which the game ball rolls from the right side of the stage 255 to the first start port 225. It is impossible for the game ball to win the first starting port 225 from the right side of the stage 255.

  When a game ball passes through the passing gate 254 during the normal symbol variation display, the display mode by the normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b is switched, and the passing gate is displayed until the normal symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the normal symbol variation display based on the passing of the game ball to 254 is suspended. After that, when the normal symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed normal symbol that has been suspended is started.

  When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed as a normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 233, an effect image that allows the player to grasp that the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232. You may be made to do.

  In addition, a shutter 240 that opens and closes the grand prize winning port 239 is disposed immediately below the first start port 225. An out port 257 is formed at the lowermost part of the game area 215 immediately below the shutter 240. Three general winning holes 256a, 256b, and 256c are provided in the lower left portion of the game area 215. In addition, a general winning opening 256d is provided at the lower right side of the game area 215.

  In addition, a winning area is provided in the first starting opening 225 described above, and a first starting winning opening switch 316 (see FIG. 163 described later) is provided in the winning area. A winning area is provided in the second starting opening 244, and a second starting winning opening switch 317 (see FIG. 163 described later) is provided in the winning area. When a game medium such as a game ball is detected by the first start winning a prize opening switch 316, the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 235a is started.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 225 during the special symbol variation display, the game ball enters the first start port 225 until the special symbol during the variation display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the special symbol variation display based on is suspended. Thereafter, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed suspended special symbol is started. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 235a based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 225 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  Further, when a game medium such as a game ball is detected by the second start winning a prize opening switch 317, the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 235b is started. In addition, when a game ball enters the second start port 244 during the variation display of the special symbol, the game ball enters the second start port 244 until the special symbol during the variation display is stopped. Execution (start) of the special symbol variation display based on is suspended. Thereafter, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed suspended special symbol is started.

  In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 235b based on the game ball entering the second start port 244 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In this example, the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b do not change the special symbols at the same time. Further, in this example, the special symbol variation display is performed with priority given to the start winning at the second start port 244. Note that the first start port 225 and the second start port 244 in this example are examples of start regions provided in the game region of the game board 214 through which game balls can pass.

  In this example, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the special symbol variation display is suspended, and the special symbol variation display is suspended due to entering the first start port 225 and the second start port 244. The upper limit of the number is set to 4 times. Specifically, when the special symbol game of the first special symbol is held four times, information on the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is the main RAM 270 (see FIG. 163 described later). The information of the four special symbol games stored as the start memory information in the first special symbol start memory area (0) of the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory It is stored in the area (4) as starting storage information.

  Similarly, for the special symbol game of the second special symbol, when the special symbol game of the second special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is the main information. Information on the four special symbol games stored and stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the RAM 270 (see FIG. 163 described later) as the start storage information is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1 ) To the second special symbol start storage area (4). Therefore, in this example, the special symbol game can be held up to 8 times.

  In addition, as another variable display start condition for the predetermined special symbol in this example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, every time a predetermined special symbol variable display start condition is satisfied, the special symbol variable display is started.

  In the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, when the special symbol is in a specific stop display mode and the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the shutter 240 is in an open state in which it is easy to accept the game ball. It is driven to become. As a result, the special winning opening 239 is in an open state (first state) in which a game ball can be easily received.

On the other hand, the special winning opening 239 provided on the back side (rear side) of the shutter 240 has an area (not shown) having a count switch 304 (see FIG. 163 described later), and a predetermined number of game balls (not shown) The shutter 240 is driven to open until a predetermined time (for example, about 0.1 second or about 30 seconds) elapses. When either a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the grand prize winning opening 239 or a predetermined time elapses in the open state, the shutter 240 is driven so as to be in a closed state where it is difficult to accept the game balls. . As a result, the special winning opening 239 is in a closed state in which it is difficult to accept a game ball (second state).

  Note that a game in which the special winning opening 239 easily accepts a game ball for a certain period of time is called a round game. Therefore, the shutter 240 is opened during the round game and closed between the round games. The number of round games is counted as the number of rounds such as “1” round and “2” round. For example, the first round game may be referred to as the first round and the second round as the second round. In this example, in one round, the shutter 240 may be opened and closed a plurality of times, and the time for the open state may be set to a certain time.

  Next, the shutter 240 driven from the open state (first state) to the closed state (second state) is again driven to the open state. That is, when the round game is finished, it is possible to continue to the next round game. A game from the first round game until the end of the round game (final round game) that cannot continue to the next round game is referred to as a special game or a jackpot game. In this example, the number of round games in all jackpots is 15 rounds.

  Further, in this example, when the special symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b and the gaming state shifts to the small hit gaming state, the big prize opening 239 is displayed. The shutter 240 is driven so as to be in an open state where it is easy to accept the game ball 15 times or 16 times. The small hit game is a game in which the big winning opening 239 is opened 15 times or 16 times, and there is no concept of a round game like the big win. However, the configuration of the above-described winning prize opening 239 and the shutter 240 is provided on the game board 214 and can be changed between an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. It is an example of 1 structure of a variable member.

  In addition, when game balls win the first start port 225, the second start port 244, the general winning ports 256a to 256d, and the big winning port 239, the number of game balls set in advance according to the type of each winning port. Is dispensed to the upper plate 221 or the lower plate 222.

  Further, in this example, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state shifts to a short time state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes a high probability state and the holding ball of the special symbol game is easily stored by the support by the ordinary electric accessory 248. There is a case. In this example, in the short-time state, passing the game ball to the passing gate 254 is a condition for executing the normal symbol lottery, so that the game proceeds while making a right strike.

  Further, when a big hit occurs in the right-handed state, it is possible to win the big winning opening 239 by continuing the right-handed as it is. Further, when the support by the ordinary electric accessory 248 is not received, the game is advanced while making a left strike.

In addition, a rotating accessory unit 370 is provided on the game board 214 of the pachinko 210.
The rotating accessory unit 370 is disposed on the lower right side of the game board 214, and includes an accessory driving unit 372 (see FIG. 163) that includes a rotating accessory (gear accessory) 371 and a stepping motor that rotates the rotating accessory 371. ) And. The rotating combination 371 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 400 and rotates in a pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect when a predetermined effect is performed, thereby producing a game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 160, three effect buttons 280a, 280b, 280c are provided on the front side of the upper plate 221, and during these mini-games such as a push game, a card turn, a sugoroku, etc. By pressing the effect button, the effect display content on the liquid crystal display device 232 can be changed. It should be noted that an image having the same shape as the effect buttons 280a, 280b, 280c is displayed on the sub screen 232c of the liquid crystal display device 232, and the position corresponding to the position where the above image of the sub screen 232C is displayed on the touch input unit 361 (for example, front- The effect display content in the liquid crystal display device 232 may be changed according to the finger touching the portion facing the direction. In this case, the installation of the three effect buttons 280a, 280b, 280c can be omitted.

[Pachinko circuit configuration]
Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko 210 in this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko 210 in this example.

  The pachinko 210 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 260 that controls a game and a sub-control circuit 400 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

  The main control circuit 260 includes a main CPU 266, a main ROM 268 (read only memory), and a main RAM 270 (read / write memory).

  The main CPU 266 is connected to the main ROM 268, the main RAM 270, and the like, and has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the main ROM 268.

  The main ROM 268 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko 210 by the main CPU 266, various programs for causing the main CPU 266 to execute main processing, and various tables necessary for the various processes.

  The main RAM 270 is a temporary storage area of the main CPU 266 and has a function of storing various flags and variable values necessary for various processes. In this example, an example in which the main RAM 270 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 266 will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary storage area of the main CPU 266 may be any readable / writable storage medium. Things can be used.

  The main control circuit 260 includes an initial reset circuit 264, an I / O port 271, and a command output port 272. The initial reset circuit 264 is a circuit that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 266. The I / O port 271 is a port that transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 266, and a port that transmits output signals from the main CPU 266 to various devices. The command output port 272 is a port for transmitting a command output from the main CPU 266 to the sub control circuit 400.

  The main control circuit 260 includes a backup capacitor 274. The backup capacitor 274 is provided to quickly supply power to the main RAM 270, for example, when power is interrupted. As a result, various data stored in the main RAM 270 can be held even when power is interrupted.

  Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 260.

  In this example, the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b that perform variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game as various devices according to the signal output from the main control circuit 260, in the special symbol game First special symbol hold display LEDs 234a and 234b and second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c and 234d for displaying the number of reserved special symbols for variable display, and a normal symbol display device for performing variable display of normal symbols as identification symbols in a normal symbol game 233, normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b for displaying the number of hold of variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game, the start-port solenoid 318 for bringing the tongue-like member 248a of the normal electric accessory 248 into the protruding state or the retracted state, and the shutter 240 , And the grand prize winning opening 239 is opened or closed Winning opening solenoid 320 such that the state is connected to the main control circuit 260.

  The main control circuit 260 is used to transmit data to a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines throughout the hall. An external terminal board 510 is connected.

  Further, the main control circuit 260 includes, for example, a count switch 304 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260 when the game ball passes through an area in the big winning opening 239, and general winning holes 256a to 256d. When a game ball passes, the main detection circuit switches 306, 308, 310, 312 and a pass gate 254 that supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260. When the game ball wins the passing gate switch 314 and the first starting port 225 supplied to the control circuit 260, the first starting winning port switch 316 and the second starting port 244 that supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260. When a game ball wins, a second start winning port switch 317 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260, a back-up at power failure, etc. Such as backup clear switch 324 to be cleared in accordance with the Pudeta operation of the gaming store administrators are connected.

  The main control circuit 260 is connected to a payout / launch control circuit 326. The payout / firing control circuit 326 is connected to a payout device 328 for paying out game balls, a launch device 330 for launching game balls, and a card unit 500. Note that the card unit 500 can be transmitted / received to / from a ball lending operation panel 355 that outputs a signal for requesting the card unit 500 to lend a game ball by a player's operation.

  The payout / launch control circuit 326 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 260 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 500, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 328. The game ball payout operation by the payout device 328 is controlled. Further, the payout / firing control circuit 326 supplies electric power to the firing solenoid according to the turning angle when the launching handle 226 is gripped by the player and is turned clockwise. Controls the launch operation of the sphere.

  Further, the sub control circuit 400 is connected to the command output port 272. The sub-control circuit 400 controls various effects according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 260, that is, control of the rotating accessory unit 370, display control on the liquid crystal display device 232, and sound generated from the speaker 246. And control of lamps including the lamp 332 and the like. The sub-control circuit 400 has the same configuration as that of the sub-control circuit 101 described in the pachislot 1 of the above-described embodiment, and can execute the same various processes.

  That is, the sub-control circuit 400 can execute the same control as the above-mentioned accessory control task (see FIG. 120) in the control of the rotating accessory unit 370. In addition, in the accessory pattern data constituting the accessory effect sequence in this case, there is one in which a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the accessory pattern data is set, and as this start condition, For example, the input to the touch input unit 361 and the pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b, and 280c are set.

  The sub-control circuit 400 can execute the same control as the lamp control task (see FIG. 121) in the control of the lamp including the lamp 332 and the like. In the control of the lamp, the processes of S915 to S917 of the lamp control task (see FIG. 121) are omitted. In addition, in the lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence in this case, there is one in which a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the lamp pattern data is set. As the start condition, for example, touch Input to the input unit 361 and pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b, 280c are set.

  Further, the sub-control circuit 400 can execute the same control as the sound control task (see FIG. 122) in the control relating to the sound generated from the speaker 246. Note that the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence in this case has a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the sound pattern data, and as this start condition, for example, touch Input to the input unit 361 and pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b, 280c are set.

  Further, the sub control circuit 400 executes the same control as the animation control task (see FIG. 123) in the display control in the liquid crystal display device 232. In the display control, S947 of the animation control task (see FIG. 123) is a case where the animation effect sequence data set in S944 is a stop display mode in which a predetermined effect, for example, a special symbol shifts to a big hit gaming state. This is a process for determining whether or not the animation production sequence is related to the production. In addition, the animation pattern data constituting the animation presentation sequence in this case includes a start condition for starting the production of the pattern indicated by the animation pattern data. As this start condition, for example, touch Input to the input unit 361 and pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b, 280c are set.

  Further, the sub control circuit 400 can execute processing similar to the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124) and touch panel input editing processing (see FIG. 125) in the control of the touch sensor module 360. Further, the sub-control circuit 400 performs the OFF edge execution similar to that of the pachislot 1 when the selectable item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 232 is selected by the touch sensor module 360 by an operator such as a player. The selection can be detected when the finger is removed from the input unit 360a.

  The sub-control circuit 400 can execute processing similar to the hall menu task (see FIG. 127), hall menu processing (see FIG. 129), and maintenance processing (FIG. 131). That is, the sub-control circuit 400 can display a cross-shaped grid line including a vertical line and a horizontal line orthogonal to the vertical line on the sub-screen 232c during the maintenance process.

  As described above, also in the pachinko machine 210 according to the above-described modification, the sub-control circuit 400 can execute the same process as that described in the pachislot machine 1 in the above embodiment. Therefore, the same effect as the embodiment of the pachi-slot 1 can be obtained.

  The gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention has been described above including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described herein, and it goes without saying that various embodiments are included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, when “bonus winning” is determined by the bonus lottery, “SBB”, “BB”, or “RB” is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, either “SBB or BB” or “RB” is determined by a bonus distribution lottery, and “SBB” or “BB” is determined at the end of the precursor game. May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “SBB” or “BB” precursor game is being performed, the “BB precursor flag” is turned on. In other words, the “SBB” and “BB” precursor games are managed by the “BB precursor flag”. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured to have a precursor flag for “SBB” and a precursor flag for “BB”. In this case, the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “SBB” may be different from the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “BB”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART are terminated on the condition that the game of the number of staying games has been consumed. However, the first ART and the second ART according to the present invention may be configured to end on condition that a predetermined number of navigations (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of stay games of “SBB” in the first ART is fixed to “100”. However, “SBB” according to the present invention may have a configuration in which the number of staying games is added to (added to) the number of staying games in “SBB”, similarly to “BB”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games for performing additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR is fixed to “2”. That is, when the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, “2” is set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for performing the additional additions A, B, and C according to the present invention may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional added game number counter may be varied according to the type of additional added effect (addition added A, B, C).

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which “50” is determined as the number of stay games of the second ART has been described. However, instead of this, a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, one set “50” game), and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games in the second ART may be set to two sets of “50” games, that is, a total of “100” games.
In this case, a predetermined period during which the stop order is not notified between sets and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game may be provided. Further, an extra game number lottery may be performed for each game in the predetermined period. Then, before this predetermined period ends (when this predetermined period is ended when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), a stop order other than forward pressing If a stop operation (an irregular press) is performed, the predetermined period is forcibly ended, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by “1” for each game from the next game after the irregular press. May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the accessory provided in the pachi-slot 1, the rotating accessory unit 122 having the rotating accessory 123 that rotates by driving the stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachi-slot 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-rear direction by driving a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel (variation display means), 3C ... Middle reel (variation display means), 3R ... Right reel (variation display means) 4L ... Left display window, 4C ... Medium display window, 4R ... Right display window, 11 ... Liquid crystal display device (display means), 16 ... Start lever, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right Stop button, 20L, 20R ... speaker, 22 ... reel lamp, 31 ... touch sensor module (touch sensor module), 46S ... medal sensor (insertion operation detection means), 64 ... start switch (start operation detection means), 91 ... main Control circuit (internal winning combination determining means, stop control means, game medium giving means), 93... Main CPU, 10 ... sub-control circuit (display control means, detecting means), 102 ... sub CPU, 103 ... sub RAM (data storage means), 122 ... rotary won game unit, 200 ... server

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of controlling a special gaming state advantageous for a player by performing a game by variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A music output means capable of outputting a plurality of music;
A music selection means that allows a player to select a music that is output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music;
An output content changing means that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected by the music selection means,
The special gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued over a predetermined number of games,
The plurality of songs include specific songs,
The music output means, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, can output the first part and the second part following the first part in the specific music in the special gaming state,
The first portion of the specific music is set to a time longer than a value obtained by multiplying the predetermined time by the minimum time required to perform one game,
The output content changing means outputs so that, when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means starts output from the second portion of the specific music in the special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the contents can be changed.

Images